اشتراطات العاصمة

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫فى إطار سعى شركﺔ العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ للتنميﺔ العمرانيﺔ نحو تطوير سبل إنجاز المشروعات بالعاصمﺔ‬
‫اﻹداريﺔ الجﺪيﺪة بجودة عاليﺔ تتوافق ﻣع المكانﺔ العالميﺔ للمشروع‪ ،‬وفى ﺿوء ﻣواكبﺔ التطور العالمي‬
‫وتوجهات السوق المحلي وتسهيل اﻹجراءات الﻼزﻣﺔ لﻼعتمادات الخاصﺔ بشبكات الكهرباء‬
‫لمشروعات العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وحيث أن شركﺔ العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ قﺪ سبق لها وأن قاﻣت بإصﺪار الﻘواعﺪ المنظمﺔ لتنميط شبكات‬
‫الكهرباء والتي تنﺪرج في التالي‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣواصفات المهمات الكهربيﺔ إصﺪار أغسطس ‪) 2018‬العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ – المجموعﺔ اﻻستشاريﺔ‬
‫شاكر(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اشتراطات نظام الطاقﺔ الشمسيﺔ وكيفيﺔ الربط على شبكﺔ الكهرباء إصﺪار ‪) 2019‬العاصمﺔ‬
‫اﻹداريﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اشتراطات التصميم الكهربي بشركﺔ العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ إصﺪار ﻣارس ‪) 2021‬العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫لذا فﻘﺪ رأت شركﺔ العاصمﺔ اﻹداريﺔ ﺿرورة اﻻستمرار في تحﺪيث وتطوير كل ﻣا يتعلق بمواصفات‬
‫المهمات الكهربيﺔ واشتراطات التصميم الكهربي وكل ﻣا يحتاجه المطور بحيث تكون في ﻣرجع واحﺪ‬
‫)‪ (REDBOOK‬بحيث يخضع لكافﺔ المواصفات الﻘياسيﺔ العالميﺔ واﻷكواد الخاصﺔ باﻷعمال الكهرباء‪.‬‬
‫آملين أن يساهم هذا المرجع فى مساعدة كافة المطورين ﻧﺤو تلبية احتياجاتهم والرد على كافة تساؤﻻتهم‬
‫واستفساراتهم ومواكبة التطور فى شتى ال مجاﻻت المتعلقة بشبكات الكهرباء بمشروع العاصمة اﻹدارية‬
‫الجديدة‪.‬‬
‫شركة العاصمة اﻹدارية للتنمية العمراﻧية‬
‫‪ACUD electric red book‬‬ ‫‪1 of 221‬‬ ‫‪Rev.0, Jan 2023‬‬

‫‪Introduction‬‬
Table of Contents
Contents
ENERGIZATION PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................... 11
I. GUIDELINE FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS AND INSTALLATIONS .......................................................... 12
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 13
1.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 13
2. Power Supply Methodology.......................................................................................................... 13
2.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 13
2.2 Load Estimate........................................................................................................................ 13
2.3 Power Supply Criteria ........................................................................................................... 15
3. Technical Parameters.................................................................................................................... 16
3.1 Electrical Rooms .................................................................................................................... 16
3.1.1 Project Tie-in point........................................................................................................ 16
3.1.2 Arrangement and installation requirements ................................................................ 16
3.2 Medium Voltage network ..................................................................................................... 20
3.2.1 Medium Voltage cables................................................................................................. 20
3.2.2 Main feeder route ......................................................................................................... 21
3.2.3 Ring main unit (RMU) .................................................................................................... 22
3.2.4 Distribution Transformers and kiosks ........................................................................... 22
3.3 Low voltage network............................................................................................................. 23
3.3.1 Low Voltage Cables ....................................................................................................... 23
3.3.2 Main distribution boards (MDB) ................................................................................... 23
3.3.3 Distribution box (feeder Pillar)...................................................................................... 23
3.3.4 Power Factor correction ............................................................................................... 24
3.3.5 Earth Leakage Protection .............................................................................................. 24
3.4 Meters ................................................................................................................................... 25
3.5 Street lighting ........................................................................................................................ 25
3.6 Solar system .......................................................................................................................... 25
3.7 Car chargers .......................................................................................................................... 26
3.8 High rise building .................................................................................................................. 26
II. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................... 28
A. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ............................................................................ 29
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 29
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................... 29
ACUD electric red book 2 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

Table of contents
1.2 DEFINITIONS.......................................................................................................................... 29
1.3 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................. 30
1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 30
1.5 POWER SUPPLY ..................................................................................................................... 31
1.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... 31
1.7 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................... 32
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................ 35
1.9 WARRANTY............................................................................................................................ 36
1.10 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS............................................................................................... 37
B. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES .......................................................................................................... 39
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 39
2. PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................................... 39
2.1 MV CABLE .............................................................................................................................. 39
2.2 CABLE TERMINATION AND SPLICE CONNECTORS................................................................. 40
2.3 CABLE CLEATS........................................................................................................................ 42
2.4 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING ................................................................................... 42
C. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ................................................ 44
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 44
2. PRODUCT....................................................................................................................................... 44
2.1 LV WIRES AND CABLES .......................................................................................................... 44
2.2 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES ............................................................................................. 47
2.3 TERMINATION AND SPLICE CONNECTORS (LV POWER) ....................................................... 47
2.4 CABLE GLANDS ...................................................................................................................... 49
D. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ............................................................. 50
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 50
2. PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................................... 50
2.1 ELECTRODES .......................................................................................................................... 50
2.2 EARTHING CONDUCTORS...................................................................................................... 51
2.3 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL ................................................................................................. 51
2.4 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS .................................................................................................. 52
3. MV DISTRIBUTOR ROOM GROUNDING ........................................................................................ 53
4. RING MAIN UNIT (RMU) ROOM GROUNDING .............................................................................. 53
5. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS AND KIOSKS GROUNDING ......................................................... 53
E. LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES ................................................................................. 54
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 54

Table of contents
2. PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................................... 54
2.1 Submittals ............................................................................................................................. 54
2.2 Lightning Protection System Components ............................................................................ 54
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 55
F. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS AND RING MAIN UNITS......................................................... 58
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 58
2. PRIMARY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR ................................................................................. 61
2.1 Incoming Feeder Panels ........................................................................................................ 62
2.2 Outgoing Feeder Panel.......................................................................................................... 63
2.3 Bus Sectionalized Cubicle ...................................................................................................... 64
2.4 MV CIRCUIT BREAKERS ......................................................................................................... 66
2.5 MV DISCONNECTORS (FOR INSTALLATION IN PRIMARY SWITCHGEAR)............................... 67
3. SECONDRY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR .............................................................................. 68
4. SMART GRID SWITCHGEAR REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (SWGRTU): .............................................. 68
4.1 GENERAL: .............................................................................................................................. 68
4.2 SWG-RTU Control and Monitoring Functions ....................................................................... 69
4.3 SWG-RTU Archives function.................................................................................................. 69
4.4 SWG-RTU Communication .................................................................................................... 70
4.5 SWG RTU signal list: .............................................................................................................. 72
4.6 EQUIPMENT DATA ................................................................................................................ 76
4.7 BATTERY ................................................................................................................................ 76
4.8 AUTOMATIC FLOAT BATTERY CHARGER ............................................................................... 77
4.9 DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD ..................................................................................................... 79
5. SMART GRID RING MAIN UNITS (Type-A and Type-B) .................................................................. 79
5.1 General Specifications........................................................................................................... 79
5.2 Voltage Presence Indicators (VPI) ......................................................................................... 81
5.3 Communicating Fault Passage indicator with integral voltage detector FPIVD ................... 82
5.4 General Specifications for RMU Remote Terminal Unit (RMU-RTU) .................................... 83
5.4.1 RMU-RTU Control and Monitoring Functions ............................................................... 83
5.4.2 Archives ......................................................................................................................... 84
5.4.3 Communication ............................................................................................................. 84
5.4.4 RMU RTU signal list ....................................................................................................... 89
G. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER: .................................................................................................... 93
1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 93
1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: ...................................................................................................... 93

Table of contents
1.1.1 CHARACTERISTICS: ........................................................................................................ 93
1.1.2 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................ 94
1.1.3 PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................. 96
1.2 THERMAL PROTECTION......................................................................................................... 96
1.3 RTU Signal list ........................................................................................................................ 97
H. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER KIOSK: .......................................................................................... 98
1. PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................................... 98
1.1 KIOSK SPECIFICATIONS: ......................................................................................................... 98
1.2 KIOSK COMPONENTS: ......................................................................................................... 100
1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS............................................................................. 100
I. LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR (Main distribution board) ............................................................ 101
1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 101
2. PRODUCTS: .................................................................................................................................. 101
2.1 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................. 101
2.2 BUS BARS............................................................................................................................. 102
2.3 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS ........................................................................................................ 103
2.3.1 withdrawable type: ..................................................................................................... 104
2.3.2 OPERATING MECHANISMS.......................................................................................... 104
2.3.3 OPERATING FACILITIES ................................................................................................ 105
2.3.4 PROTECTION AND TRIPPING ....................................................................................... 105
2.3.5 AUXILIARY CONTACTS ................................................................................................. 106
2.4 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................................................................................... 107
2.4.1 TERMINALS .................................................................................................................. 108
2.4.2 OPERATING MECHANISMS.......................................................................................... 108
2.4.3 ENCLOSURES ............................................................................................................... 108
2.4.4 PROTECTION MECHANISMS ........................................................................................ 109
2.4.5 OPERATING FACILITIES ................................................................................................ 109
2.4.6 AUXILIARY CONTACTS ................................................................................................. 109
2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS .................................................................................................. 110
2.6 DIGITAL METERING UNITS .................................................................................................. 110
2.7 WIRING ................................................................................................................................ 111
2.8 LABELS ................................................................................................................................. 111
2.9 COMPONENTS ..................................................................................................................... 112
2.10 DIGITAL VOLTAGE RELAY .................................................................................................... 112
2.11 SELECTOR SWITCHES / PUSH-BUTTONS / INDICATOR LAMPS ............................................ 112

Table of contents
2.12 WIRING TERMINALS ............................................................................................................ 113
2.13 RTU signal list ...................................................................................................................... 114
J. ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES: ...................................................................................................... 115
1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 115
2. PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................... 116
2.1 BUSWAY .............................................................................................................................. 116
2.2 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES: ........................................................................................... 117
2.3 FIRE STOPPING .................................................................................................................... 117
K. FEEDER PILLARS AND LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR AND OUTDOOR TYPE)................................. 118
1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 118
1.1 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......................................................................................... 118
1.2 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................................................................................... 119
1.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 119
1.2.2 CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................................... 119
1.3 CONTACTORS ...................................................................................................................... 121
1.4 FEEDER PILLAR: ................................................................................................................... 121
1.5 LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR TYPE) ...................................................................................... 122
1.6 STREET LIGHTING PANELS (OUDOOR TYPE): ...................................................................... 123
L. EXTERIOR LIGHTING: ................................................................................................................... 126
1. PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................... 126
1.1 FLOODLIGHTS ...................................................................................................................... 129
1.2 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LIGHTING SYSTEM: ............................................................. 130
1.3 LED DRIVERS TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................... 131
1.4 LIGHTING COLUMNS ........................................................................................................... 132
1.5 SMART POLE:....................................................................................................................... 134
1.6 STREET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................................................. 134
1.7 UNDERWATER LIGHTING LUMINAIRES ............................................................................... 135
1.8 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS......................................................................................................... 135
M. PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 137
1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 137
1.1 SUBMITTALS: ....................................................................................................................... 138
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ......................................................................................................... 138
1.2.1 Qualifications: ............................................................................................................. 138
1.2.2 Local Representative: .................................................................................................. 138
1.2.3 Mock-Up:..................................................................................................................... 139

Table of contents
1.2.4 Standards: ................................................................................................................... 139
2. PRODUCTS: .................................................................................................................................. 141
2.1 SUMMARY: .......................................................................................................................... 141
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: ........................................................................................................ 142
2.3 PV MODULES: ...................................................................................................................... 143
2.4 DC CABLES ........................................................................................................................... 145
2.5 DC COMBINER AND MONITORING BOXES .......................................................................... 145
2.6 INVERTERS........................................................................................................................... 147
2.7 PV MOUNTING STRUCTURES .............................................................................................. 150
2.8 AC CABLES AND RACEWAYS ................................................................................................ 150
2.9 PV MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................................................... 151
2.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING .............................................................................................. 154
2.11 PROTECTION AGAINST LIGHTNING and OVERVOLTAGE ..................................................... 155
2.12 OPERATIONS and MAINTENANCE MANUAL ....................................................................... 155
2.13 COORDINATION .................................................................................................................. 156
2.14 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ....................................................................................................... 157
2.15 WARRANTY.......................................................................................................................... 157
3. EXECUTION.................................................................................................................................. 158
3.1 INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................................... 158
3.2 IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 158
3.3 ADJUSTING .......................................................................................................................... 158
3.4 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................ 158
N. Electric Vehicle Charging stations: .............................................................................................. 160
1. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 160
1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 160
1.2 SCOPE .................................................................................................................................. 160
1.3 STANDARDS......................................................................................................................... 160
2. PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................... 161
2.1 EV Charging Station specified types:................................................................................... 161
2.2 AC Input: ............................................................................................................................. 162
2.3 AC Output Mode 3: ............................................................................................................. 162
2.4 DC Output Mode 4: ............................................................................................................. 162
2.5 User interface and payment: .............................................................................................. 163
2.6 Construction and other details: .......................................................................................... 163
2.6.1 Construction ................................................................................................................ 163

Table of contents
2.6.2 Fire Protection: ........................................................................................................... 163
2.7 Connectivity ........................................................................................................................ 163
2.8 SAFETY:................................................................................................................................ 164
O. MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED LIST ................................................................................... 166
1. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE/ LOW VOLTAGE CABLES: ............................................................................. 166
2. MV/LV CABLE CONNECTORS: ...................................................................................................... 166
3. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: .......................................................... 166
4. PRIMARY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS AND RING MAIN UNITS:...................................... 166
5. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER: .................................................................................................. 166
6. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER KIOSK: ........................................................................................ 167
7. LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR, FEEDER PILLARS AND LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR AND OUTDOOR
TYPE) ................................................................................................................................................... 167
8. ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES: ...................................................................................................... 167
9. EXTERIOR LIGHTING: ................................................................................................................... 167
10. PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 168
11. Electric vehicle charging stations: ........................................................................................... 168
III. Quality Guideline for Electrical Works .................................................................................... 170
A. Testing quality procedures.......................................................................................................... 171
1. Transformers ............................................................................................................................... 171
1.1 Type tests ............................................................................................................................ 171
1.1.1 Standard and special tests: ......................................................................................... 171
1.2 Routine Tests: ..................................................................................................................... 171
1.2.1 Measurement of winding resistance .......................................................................... 172
1.2.2 Measurement of voltage ratio and check of vector relationship ............................... 173
1.2.3 Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss .................................................... 174
1.2.4 Measurement of no-load loss and current ................................................................. 176
1.2.5 Dielectric tests, Separate-source voltage withstand test ........................................... 177
1.2.6 Induced over-voltage withstand test .......................................................................... 178
1.2.7 Partial discharge measurement .................................................................................. 179
1.2.8 FAT TEST ...................................................................................................................... 180
1.2.9 SAT TEST ...................................................................................................................... 180
2. Cables .......................................................................................................................................... 180
2.1 type tests............................................................................................................................. 180
2.2 Routine Tests (Sample test) ................................................................................................ 181
2.2.1 Conductor Examination (MV and LV) .......................................................................... 182
2.2.2 Check of dimensions: .................................................................................................. 182

Table of contents
2.2.3 Hot set test for XLPE insulations (LV and MV) ............................................................ 185
2.2.4 Voltage test for 4h (MV) ............................................................................................. 186
2.3 Routine tests (for complete package) ................................................................................. 186
2.3.1 Measurement of the electrical dc resistance of conductors (MV and LV): ................ 186
2.3.2 Partial discharge test (MV and LV) .............................................................................. 187
2.3.3 Voltage test: ................................................................................................................ 187
2.3.4 Electrical test on over sheath of the cable (MV)......................................................... 188
2.3.5 FAT tests ...................................................................................................................... 189
2.3.6 SAT tests ...................................................................................................................... 189
3. Primary Medium voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units ........................................................ 189
3.1 Type tests ............................................................................................................................ 189
3.1.1 One-Minute Dry-power frequency voltage withstand test ........................................ 190
3.1.2 One-Minute Wet-power frequency voltage withstand test ....................................... 190
3.1.3 Lightning Impulse voltage dry withstand test ............................................................. 190
3.1.4 Switching Impulse voltage withstand test (Optional) ................................................. 191
3.1.5 Partial discharge test (Optional) ................................................................................. 191
3.1.6 Artificial pollution test ................................................................................................ 191
3.1.7 Switchgear design aspects .......................................................................................... 191
3.2 Routine tests ....................................................................................................................... 193
3.2.1 Insulation Resistance Measurement Test ................................................................... 193
3.2.2 High-Potential (Hi-pot) Test ........................................................................................ 195
3.2.3 Power factor or dielectric loss test ............................................................................. 198
3.2.4 Circuit Breaker Contact Resistance Measurement Test ............................................. 198
3.2.5 Circuit Breaker Time-Travel Analysis .......................................................................... 199
3.2.6 WIRING CHECK ............................................................................................................ 203
3.2.7 MECHANICAL TESTS .................................................................................................... 203
3.2.8 ELECTRICAL TESTS ....................................................................................................... 204
3.2.9 FAT tests ...................................................................................................................... 204
3.2.10 SAT tests ...................................................................................................................... 205
B. Inspection procedures ................................................................................................................ 206
1. Transformer’s checklist ............................................................................................................... 206
2. Cables inspections....................................................................................................................... 207
2.1 Cables, Low-Voltage, 600 Volt Maximum ........................................................................... 207
2.2 Cables medium-voltage ...................................................................................................... 207
3. Primary Medium voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units checklist ......................................... 208

Table of contents
C. Energization process and Quality procedures after energizing .................................................. 211
1. Energization Process: .................................................................................................................. 211
1.1 Transformers ....................................................................................................................... 211
1.2 cables .................................................................................................................................. 211
1.3 Primary Medium voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units ................................................ 211
IV. Electrical safety guideline ....................................................................................................... 212
1. Introduction: ............................................................................................................................... 213
2. MEDICAL SERVICES, TREATMENT, & REPORTING ....................................................................... 213
3. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 214
4. Emergency response plan ........................................................................................................... 214
5. Working on Energized Parts and Equipment: ............................................................................. 215
5.1 Energized work permits ...................................................................................................... 216
5.2 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT ............................................................................................................. 217
5.3 Stored energy:..................................................................................................................... 218
5.4 Re-energizing protocols: ..................................................................................................... 218
6. Electrical System Grounding and Bonding .................................................................................. 218
7. Personal Protective Equipment .................................................................................................. 219
7.1 Eye protection ..................................................................................................................... 219
7.2 Head protection .................................................................................................................. 219
7.3 Footwear ............................................................................................................................. 220
7.4 Electrical protective gloves ................................................................................................. 220
8. First aid........................................................................................................................................ 221

Table of contents
ENERGIZATION PROCEDURES
A. The developer shall receive REDBOOK from ACUD.
B. The developer submits the project documents for review and approval.
C. Factory shop drawings for electrical equipment shall be submitted for review and approval.
D. The developer shall invite ACUD representatives (Quality department) to attend FAT.
E. The developer should coordinate with ACUD representative (Projects department) to start the
project the site survey.
F. The developer starts the contract procedures to start the energization phase.
Developer Asks for electrical approval
Developer receives
ACUD REDBOOK
Project design drawings submittal
Approved No Developer receives

networks team comments
Yes
Project Equipment material
factory shop drawing submittal
Approved No Developer receives

networks team comments
Yes
Quality team attends FAT
Equipment
delivery to the site
Start the project the site
Ready
No Developer finishes comments and
coordinates for another site visit
Yes
The developer starts the
contract procedures
Start the energization

phase
Quality team attends SAT Project Energization

Energization procedures
I.GUIDELINE FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
AND INSTALLATIONS

Guideline for electrical work and installation
1. Introduction
1.1 General
This guideline presents the standards of ACUD for planning and designing
the infrastructure of electrical distribution network and the electrical works
for various premises to give a detailed explanation to developers,
engineering consultancy offices and contractors in preparing electrical
design study and work shop drawings, which is reviewed and approved by
ACUD in accordance with the standards, regulations and specifications to
ensure a safe, stable, reliable and economical electrical Distribution system
and to enable ACUD to fulfill their obligations to all developers.
2. Power Supply Methodology

2.1 General
The developer shall prepare all the project electrical design data and submit
the documents to ACUD to obtain the approval before project execution. The
Electrical documents shall include but not limited to the following:
A. Electrical calculations sheet.
B. Load graduation plan.
C. MV/LV single line diagram.
D. MV/LV cables routing.
E. Electrical equipment arrangement and installation inside electrical
rooms.
F. (Distributor room – Ring main unit room – transformer room – MDB
room).
G. Streets lighting design including smart poles and electrical feeding.
H. Solar system design.
I. Car chargers design (if applicable).
2.2 Load Estimate
A. A comprehensive load calculation sheet shall be submitted for all project
phases comprise the total load of the project, load of each building, load
of each MV Switchgear, and load of each transformer.
B. Load estimate factors for the different building types shall be as follow:
Project activity KVA/100 m2 (*)
Residential 8
Administrative 10
Commercial 12
Basement (garage) 3

Hospitals\Medical Facilities 20
Banks 16
Medical Clinics 17.5
Mosques\churches 8
Hotels 18
Universities/High
15
Educational Facilities
Schools 14
Sports facilities 12
Outdoor Parks and Gardens 0.5
Public Services Facilities 5
Fuel Stations 8 + (No. of EV charges x 150 kVA)
Factories 30
(*) these values for projects with central A/C system
C. Diversity factor shall be taken at distribution points such as Coffree,
Distribution boxes (feeder pillars), Transformers and MV Switchgear
based on actual loads, and it shall be as follow:
Node D.F.
Coffree 0.8
Feeder pillar\ Submain DB 0.8
Transformer 0.8
Distributor 0.8
D. Diversity factor at commercial buildings shall be equal to 1.
E. The diversity factor may specify by the designer according to the design
requirement, and to be proposed supported with justification and is
subject to ACUD approval
F. Transformer loading shall be in range between (50% - 90%) of its full
capacity.
G. Voltage drop shall not exceed 5% of the normal load from MDB (Point
of Common Coupling) up to final load\circuit.
H. Load calculation sheet shall include streets lighting loads.
I. Additional load shall be added per each EV chargers as follows
Project activity EV Car Charger Load
Residential Area 11 kw
Administration Area 22 kw
Commercial Area 50 kw
J. For exact no. of charger kindly refer to Car charger section.

2.3 Power Supply Criteria
The electrical capacity will be supplied to the project after obtaining the
ACUD approval. The criteria of suppling the Electrical power to the project
shall depend on the load capacity as follow:
A. For a project has total load greater than or equal to 9000 KVA:
 The project shall be supplied with medium voltage network through a
dedicated Primary medium voltage distributor for load greater than 15
MVA and secondary medium voltage distributor for load less than or
equal 15 MVA according to ACUD electrical specifications.
 Total electrical loads on distributor shall not exceed 24000 KVA.
 This distributor shall supply number of medium voltage loops
depending on the project electrical load capacity.
 Electrical Loads on one loop shall not exceed 7000 KVA.
 Loop to loop connection shall be provided for securing backup
redundancy.
B. For a project has total load less than 9000 KVA:
 The project shall be supplied with medium voltage network whether
through a dedicated medium voltage loop or connected to a loop with
other loads, depend on the project electrical load capacity.
 Each transformer shall have its own RMU.
 For any building with load greater than or equal 1500 KVA, it shall be
supplied through the MV network, and each main distribution board
recommended to be secured by two transformer (two out of three)
scheme as such any of the two transformer is drop out the other
transformer can supply the full load.
 This Loop will be supplied from the medium voltage grid through two
medium voltage cables.
 Open loop system shall guarantee continuity of the power supply.
C. For a project has total load greater than 500 KVA:
 For any building with load greater than 500 KVA, it shall be supplied
through the MV network, and it shall have a transformer substation
inside the building.
D. For a project has total load in range between 300 and 500 KVA:
 For any building with load in range between 300 and 500 KVA, it shall
be supplied through distribution boxes (feeder pillars) from the project
low voltage electrical network or shall have its own Transformer
substation inside the building (RMU room, Transformer room, and
Low voltage room) depending on the MV/LV networks design.

 The number of main distribution panels for a building shall be greater
than or equal to the number of feeder pillars for this building, and it is
not accepted to feed one distribution panel from two different feeder
pillars.
E. For a project has total load less than or equal to 300 KVA:
 For any building with load less than or equal to 300 KVA, it shall be
supplied through distribution box (feeder pillar) from the project low
voltage electrical network.
3. Technical Parameters
3.1 Electrical Rooms
3.1.1 Project Tie-in point
A. Electrical tie-in point location shall be coordinated with ACUD and
shall be through manhole located inside project boundaries.
B. All electrical rooms shall be located inside the approved project
boundaries, and to be in the center of electrical loads as much as
possible, without any contradiction with approved roads and
sidewalk widths.
C. MV Distributor and main RMU rooms shall be located in the
ground floor level with doors are facing the road.
D. A direct access path to the Tie-in electrical room shall be provided
without any obstacles to reach the room.
E. A reserved buffer area with 8 meters width surrounding the
distributor room from all direction is required.
F. A reserved buffer area with 3 meters width surrounding the
Package\unit substation from all direction is required.
3.1.2 Arrangement and installation requirements
A. RMU, Transformer and MDB shall be installed in separate rooms.
B. MVSG and Transformer rooms shall have +3.75 meters minimum
clear height.
C. All electrical rooms shall be provided in location with easy access
and without any obstacles in front of the room doors.
D. Provide section drawings for all main electric rooms (MVSG,
Transformer and MDB rooms)
E. MDB, MVSG, RMU and Transformer room doors shall be two
hours fire rated, also room door heights shall be suitable for
equipment installations.

F. Electrical Room dimensions and equipment layout shall allow
testing, operation and maintenance to take place easily.
G. MVSG and transformer rooms shall be ventilated based on
manufacturer recommendation and heat load calculations while
MDB room is recommended to be air conditioned.
H. Electrical rooms floor level, whether located in ground floor or
basement floor, shall be elevated +50 cm from the outer finish floor
level, or elevated +50 cm from the facing road level.
I. Minimum clearance between electrical equipment and walls inside
electrical rooms shall be 80 cm from rear side and 180 cm from
front side of the medium voltage equipment and 100 cm from front
side of the low voltage equipment and shall be verified by the
equipment manufacturer.
J. Minimum width of MV/LV cable trenches shall be 80 cm for 240
mm2 and 100 cm for 400 mm2 feeders.
K. Minimum depth of MV/LV cable trenches inside electrical rooms
shall be according to cables manufacturer recommended minimum
bending radius such as:
a. 150 cm for MV cables with cross sectional area (3x400 mm2).
b. 120 cm for MV cables with cross section area (3x240 mm2).
c. 80 cm for LV cables.
L. MV cable trench inside RMU room shall be U-Shaped.
M. Firefighting system shall be installed inside electrical rooms, MV
trenches inside the room, and distributor cells.
N. Fire alarm system shall be installed inside electrical rooms.
O. Access control unit shall be installed at MV Distributer, RMU, and
Transformer rooms.
P. MV/LV sleeves with sufficient number and diameter shall be
provided and indicated on the room layout, taken into consideration
providing spare sleeves.
Q. It is preferred to locate transformer rooms in ground floor level, and
their doors shall be towards the road. In case the transformers rooms
located in the basement floor or upper floor (subject to structure
approval) level, the following requirement shall be provided:
 Transformer room shall be allocated in which provide easy access
without any obstacles, considering the equipment mobilization
path from ground floor to the room, taking into consideration
transformer is within enclosure.

 Transformer room location shall not be located in front of
basement ramp.
 A submersible pump shall be installed in front of or beside
transformer rooms to provide protection in case of water floods.
The pump shall be fed from emergency source.
 A space for ACUD maintenance vehicle shall be reserved in front
of transformer room or other approved criteria for transformer
maneuvering.
 Load break switch shall be provided for each transformer.
 Provide section drawings for transformer room and access
corridor including equipment dimensions and room height.
 Ensure that transformer access corridor is not obstructed by any
other utilities.
a. MVSG:

b. RMU:
c. TR:

3.2 Medium Voltage network
3.2.1 Medium Voltage cables
A. MV cable shall comply with ACUD electrical specifications.
B. MV cable routing shall be proposed and is subject to ACUD
approval.
C. MV cable shall be laid under sidewalk with burial depth equals 1
meter with coordination with other utilities.
D. MV cable armoring shall be either steel wire armored (SWA) type

or double steel tap armored (DSTA) type.
E. MV cables shall be laid in a way to allow cable accessibility for
easy maintenance as follow:
 For softscape or interlock tiles finishing, cables shall be laid directly
buried.
 For hardscape finishing, cables shall be laid in concrete encasement
duct bank.
 For road crossing, cables shall be laid in concrete encasement duct
bank.

F. It is not accepted to lay MV cables directly buried under Asphalt.
G. Spacing between other utilities shall be 1m horizontal and 0.7m
vertical crossing.
H. In case of MV Cables shall be laid inside basement, Cables shall be
protected by laying the cables inside concrete trench with depth of
1.2m, provided with concrete cover in addition to drainage system.
In case it is impossible to achieve that, MV cables shall be laid
inside cable tray/ladder and to be protected with a fire rated
compartment (such as cable cellar, cable trench or any other
approved criteria) for 2 hours with access panel for easy
maintenance, MV cables route shall no path through any other
utility rooms
3.2.2 Main feeder route
A. ACUD will supply the project with the electrical power feeders as
per the approved project design documents.
B. ACUD will provide the electrical feeder at the project boundary as
per the approved coordinates.
C. Main feeder cable routing shall be provided from project Tie-in
point to MVSG room in single layer arrangement.
D. The developer shall execute and complete the electrical feeder from
the project boundary to electrical tie-in room (distributor / or RMU
room).
E. Hospitals and medical facilities shall secure a supply from two
different MV loops.

F. Medium voltage Distributor shall comply with ACUD Electrical
specifications.
G. Number of incoming/outgoing cells of distributor depends on the
total load of the project.
H. Distributor shall include one spare cell at each section of the
distributer.
I. MV Switchgear shall be equipped with Remote terminal unit (RTU
– Monitor and Control) which supports IEC 61850 communication
protocol for communication with IEDs.
J. Auxiliary transformer shall be fed from RMU type B (3+1) without
metering cell and to be connected in one of the MV distributer
loops.
3.2.3 Ring main unit (RMU)
A. RMU shall comply with ACUD Electrical specifications.
B. All Tie-in RMUs shall include a separate metering cell equipped
with current transformers (support type / DIN type) and voltage
transformers (support type / DIN type), and have space for KWHr
meter, rings supplied from secondary medium voltage distributor
are excluded.
C. RMUs (3+M+1) shall be provided in location within MV loop to
make loop to loop connection as follow:
 For project that has single RMU as a tie-in point.
 For project that has its dedicated MV loop or connected to MV
loop with other projects, one of the RMUs shall be (3+M+1).
 For project that has its dedicated MV distributer with number of
MV loops, at least one RMU in each loop shall be type (3+1)
while all other are type (2+1).
D. Ring main units (3+M+1) shall be equipped with (RTU – Monitor
and Control).
E. Ring main units (2+M+1) shall be equipped with (RTU – Monitor
and Control).
F. The RMU outgoing cell that feeding transformer shall be as follow:
a. 200 A Circuit breaker/fusible load break switch for transformers
with capacity less than 1.5 MVA.
b. 630 A Circuit breaker for transformer with capacity greater than
or equal to 1.5 MVA.
3.2.4 Distribution Transformers and kiosks
A. Transformer shall comply with ACUD Electrical specifications.

B. Transformer size shall be within the range up to 2 MVA,
transformer with rating more than 2 MVA will be used under very
narrow circumstances and subject to ACUD permission.
3.3 Low voltage network
3.3.1 Low Voltage Cables
A. LV Cable shall comply with ACUD electrical specifications.
B. LV cable routing shall be proposed and is subject to ACUD
approval.
C. LV cable shall be laid under sidewalk with burial depth equals 0.8
meter with coordination with other utilities.
D. LV cable shall be laid in a way to allow cable accessibility for
maintenance.
 For softscape or interlock tiles finishing, cables shall be direct buried.
 For hardscape finishing, cables shall be laid in concrete encasement
duct bank.
 For road crossing, cables shall be laid in concrete encasement duct
bank.
E. It is not lay LV cables under Asphalt.
F. Spacing between other utilities shall be 0.6m horizontal and 0.5m
vertical crossing.
3.3.2 Main distribution boards (MDB)
A. MDB shall comply with ACUD Electrical specifications.
B. MDB specified short circuit level shall be as per the following table
or based on submitted short circuit calculations by third party
software.
Supply transformer rating MDB short circuit rating
2000 kVA 80 KA rms for 1 sec
1600 kVA/1500 kVA 60 KA rms for 1 sec
1250 kVA and below 40 KA rms for 1 sec
C. Emergency loads shall be supplied through separate ATS (4-pole
type) which fed from both normal and emergency power supply.
3.3.3 Distribution box (feeder Pillar)
A. Feeder pillar shall comply with ACUD electrical specifications.
B. Feeder pillar shall be designed with rated capacity equal to 100
KVA, 160 KVA or 200 KVA as per the demand load.
C. Each feeder pillar shall be named with its transformer number.

D. Feeder pillar that fed by two cables shall be connected to two
different CBs in the same MDB.
E. A backup connection shall be provided between the Feeder pillars,
in addition to be fed from different transformers.
F. The building that has electrical load exceed the feeder pillar
standard rating shall be provided with two feeder pillars by
maximum.
3.3.4 Power Factor correction
A. The overall power factor of all consumers shall be maintained
within 0.95 lagging.
B. Power factor correction unit consist of Capacitor banks, adjustable
MP based controller, contactors, controls, and accessories factory
installed in independent enclosures as close as possible to/or within
nominated switchboard requiring PF improvement as indicated in
power schematic. Units include a separately mounted current
transformer to sense current in the power circuit being corrected
and to provide input to unit controls.
3.3.5 Earth Leakage Protection
A. All circuits with direct contact with non-trained humans shall be
provided with residual current protection.
B. The operating current setting for residual current device (RCD)
devices at the Supply Intake must take into account the nature of
the Installation (e.g., commercial, industrial, etc.), the likelihood
and magnitude of earth fault currents, and the requirement for
protection against Indirect Contact.
C. For domestic Premises the residual current rating for RCD devices
must be 100 mA for Final Circuits supplying fixed equipment (e.g.,
general lighting, pumps, industrial machines, and all air
conditioning equipment) and 30 mA for Final Circuits supplying
Appliance’s equipment with direct access by persons (e.g. all socket
outlets, all kitchen Appliances, other Appliances accessible to
persons), and 30 mA for all Circuits in a bathroom.
D. For outdoor lighting the residual current rating for RCD devices
must be 100 mA for street lighting circuits and 30 mA for landscape
circuits.

3.4 Meters
A. KWHr meter shall be provided for every level of the electrical
distribution grid for billing and electrical power consumption.
B. All services shall be separated and supplied by dedicated service
distribution boards\panels and shall be connected to the amin MDB
through KWH meter
C. A space for MV meters shall be provided at MV distributors and ring
main units.
D. A separate bi-directional LV metering panel shall be provided before the
MDB.
E. A separate LV KWHr meter shall be provided at ATS normal supply for
electrical power consumption of the emergency system.
F. A separate LV metering panel shall be provided for each unit (residential,
commercial and offices) and shall be installed in a separate accessible
electric room or in accessible location near the main access of each unit.
3.5 Street lighting
A. Street lighting poles design layout shall be submitted, indicating the
normal poles, smart poles and electric panel locations.
B. Smart pole location shall be indicated as per ACUD Technology
department requirements.
C. All street lighting circuits shall be fully neutral.
D. Each street lighting circuit shall be provided with earthing rod at both
ends.
E. Smart poles require to be supplied by separate circuits.
F. A surge protection type-II shall be provided at main incoming of Feeder
pillars supplying street\outdoor lighting.
G. Lighting relays, Contactors and circuit breakers shall be sized correctly
to with stand high inrush currents for LED lighting circuits as per
manufacturer recommendations.
3.6 Solar system
A. Solar system design shall be proposed as per PV design guideline and is
subject to ACUD approval.
B. Solar system shall be on–Grid system with anti–islanding features.
C. 50% of rooftop areas of all buildings shall be reserved for solar panels.
D. For generation power less than one MVA solar panels shall be
connected to the main distribution board through 4-pole and KWH
energy meter.

E. For generation power greater than or equal one MVA solar panels shall
be connected to Main medium voltage switchgear through KWH energy
meter.
3.7 Car chargers
A. Empty Raceways for future Car charger shall be provided as follows:
 Type I (11 kW-400V) shall be provided for at least one parking area
dedicated to each residential unit, Raceways shall be provided from
chargers to dedicated service distribution panel or direct to dwelling unit
panel in case of twin house, town house or villa.
 Type II (22 kW-400V) shall be provided for at least 10% of parking areas
dedicated to commercial and administration buildings, Raceways shall be
provided from chargers to EV dedicated service sub main distribution
board.
 additional Empty Raceways for future Car charger type III (50 kW-400V)
1% of parking areas dedicated for Commercial buildings.
 Empty Raceways for data connection from nearest telecom room\cabinet
for each charger.
B. Provisional space for wall/pole mounted Type I, Type II chargers and
floor mounted Type III chargers
C. Provisional space for sub-main distribution board supplying EV
chargers.
D. Additional Spare breaker at the Main distribution board shall be
provided to cater total EV charger loads.
E. All car charger circuits shall be protected by Residual Current Device
(30 mA) type-B in addition to overload and short circuit protection.
F. For vehicles fuel stations, a provisional electric load shall be provided
to cater DC fast charging level III (150 kW-400V) for at least 50% of
refueling slots.
G. Car chargers design shall be proposed and is subject to ACUD approval.
3.8 High rise building
A. For high rise building design shall follow the below requirements:
 Seismic certificates for main MV\LV equipment including (MVSG,
RMU, Transformers, MDB, Busways and main electrical raceways) to
withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
Egyptian code (EPC 201-2012)
 All life safety loads shall be separated and connected to separate ATS and
shall be backed with emergency source for 8 hours.

 All loads shall be fully redundant on LV/MV levels.
 Central battery system shall be applied for emergency lighting.
B. All elevators shall be fed from emergency power supply.

II.ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Electrical specifications
A. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract
and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Electrical Work, unless otherwise specified, includes the supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the complete electrical
systems, equipment and materials described in the Specification
together with all associated ancillary work.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ACUD: Administrative Capital for Urban Development
B. ACEDC: Administrative Capital Electricity Distribution Company.
C. COC: City Operation Center of the Administrative Capital.
D. Egypt ERA: Egyptian Electric Utility and Consumer Protection
Regulatory Agency
E. NREA: New and Renewable Energy Authority
F. IP Code: Required ingress protection to comply with IEC 60529.
G. SPD: Surge Protective Device
H. MVSG: Medium voltage switchgear.
I. TR: Transformer.
J. LBS: Load break switch
K. VCB: Medium voltage vacuum circuit breaker.
L. MDB: Main distribution board.
M. MCB: Miniature circuit breaker.
N. MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker.
O. LP, ELP, PP, EPP, SDP: Final branch circuit panelboards, power
panelboards and Sub-distribution panelboards respectively, for
secondary lighting and power distribution with either miniature circuit
breaker (MCB) or molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protection on
sub-feeder or branch circuits, as shown on the Drawings.
P. DP: Distribution panelboards for power distribution with MCCB
protection on main incoming and outgoing feeder circuit breakers Type
1 or Type 2.
Q. Distribution panelboards or final branch circuit panelboards supplied
from emergency
source is prefixed with the letter “E” if supplied from emergency
source, and with letter “U” if supplied from UPS source.
R. MPPT: Maximum power point tracking.
Basic electrical materials and methods
S. PV: Photovoltaic.
T. KWp: kilowatt peak power output of a system.
U. STC: Standard Test Conditions as per IEC 61215.
V. NOCT: Normal Operating Cell Temperature.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. The scope of electrical works shall include, but shall not be necessarily
limited to the following:
a. Medium voltage distribution:
 MV switchgear and Ring Main Units.
 MV cables.
 Distribution Transformers.
 MV/LV package substations.
b. Low voltage distribution network:
 Main distribution boards.
 Distribution panels.
 Feeders, Busways, sub-feeders, and wires.
 Exterior lighting.
c. Earthing and Lightning protection systems.
d. PV system.
e. Electric Vehicle Charging stations.
1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Regulations: Carry out electrical work in accordance with the current
issue of the local codes of practice, local power authority regulations
and [Requirements for Electrical Installations – IET Wiring
Regulations (BS 7671) as published by the Institution of Engineering
and Technology and IEC Standards][National Electrical Code (NEC /
NFPA 70) as published by the National Fire Protection Association][
Egyptian code, where not in contradiction with the local codes of
practice and regulations, herein referred to collectively as 'the
Regulations'.
B. Conflict: Should an instance occur in this Specification in which
material or construction methods called for is less than minimum
requirement of the Regulations, immediately inform the Engineer in
writing. Consequent to Engineer's approval, supply the materials and
perform the work as though called for to minimum code standards.
C. Standards: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall
be manufactured and installed in compliance with the relevant
recommendations of the following or other equal and approved
standards:
a. EEA: Egyptian Electricity Authority.
b. IEC: The International Electro-Technical Commission.
c. BS: British Standards.
d. ISO: The International Standardization Organization.
e. CENELEC: European Committee for Electrotechnical
Standardization.
f. IET: The Institution of Engineering and Technology.
g. CIE: International Commission of Illumination.
D. In case of contradiction between enforced and relevant local regulations
and International Standards, the Local regulations shall prevail.
1.5 POWER SUPPLY
A. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:
 Medium voltage: 22 kV, 3 phase, 3 wire.
 Low voltage: 380/220 V, 3 phase, 5 wire, TN-C-S.
 Frequency: 50Hz.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that system’s upstream protection device
settings are recalculated by competent agency and changed as necessary
to be discriminated with the final approved load conditions.
C. KWh-metering: Liaise with the ACUD and provide necessary
instrumentation, enclosures and accessories required to affect a
complete KWH-metering installation.
1.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A. Climatic Conditions at Project’s Site:
 Altitude: 328 m above sea level.
 Maximum ambient temperature: 40 degrees C (in the shade).
 Minimum ambient temperature: 7.8 degrees C.
 Maximum relative humidity: 65 %.
B. Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the project environmental
conditions specified here below encountered at the installed location
without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating
capability, unless otherwise specified. For devices located in harsh
environments such as interior uncontrolled or exterior environments,
the Contractor shall provide the necessary housings or enclosures to
ensure proper equipment operation and performance.
a. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, installed in
air-conditioned interior environments shall be rated for continuous
operation in ambient conditions of 30 deg C dry bulb and 27 percent
relative humidity, noncondensing.
b. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in
non-airconditioned interior environments shall be rated for

continuous operation in ambient conditions of 40 deg C dry bulb and
65 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.
c. Exterior Environment, Under Direct Sunlight: System components
installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for
continuous operation in ambient conditions of 55 deg C dry bulb and
65 percent relative humidity, condensing, when exposed to winds up
to 160 km/h.
d. Exterior Environment, Under Shade: System components installed
in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous
operation in ambient conditions of 45 deg C dry bulb and 65 percent
relative humidity, condensing, when exposed to winds up to 160
km/h.
C. All electrical equipment including transformers, switchgears, cables,
relays, lighting fixtures, motors, etc. shall be designed or derated for
continuous and trouble-free service under the following climatic
conditions:
 Interior Environment – where installed indoors.
 Exterior Environment – where installed outdoors.
D. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are
required for particular equipment, they are described in the specification
of the equipment concerned.
E. Equipment, apparatus, material accessories installed outdoors shall be
corrosion and salinity proof. UV stabilized requirement shall be applied
for outdoor installations and their surface finish and due certification
shall be provided by manufacturer as necessary.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Generally: Submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature,
shop and construction drawings and other information required by the
Specification, before ordering equipment or materials and before
executing any related work on site.
B. Product Data: Submit for approval detailed product data such as model
no., all relevant ratings, country of manufacture, interface details as
necessary, covers and supports.
C. Calculations: Submit for approval the manufacturer/supplier
calculations for the following systems, prior to ordering/manufacturing
the material:
a. Indoor and outdoor lighting distribution, with necessary supporting
documents and photometric data of the lighting fixtures proposed
and approved by the Contractor.
b. Circuit breakers selectivity and discrimination calculation study for
a full selective and discriminated distribution scheme.

c. Voltage drops and short circuit calculations after verification of
cable and breaker sizes.
d. Generators sizing calculations.
e. Power factor correction capacitors sizing based on the final
approved loads.
f. Battery bank calculations to fulfill the specification requirements
provided for the specific equipment.
g. Rating / derating calculations for the specified equipment.
h. Lightning risk assessment and energy coordination studies for surge
protection.
i. Harmonic analysis.
j. Earthing.
k. Relay settings.
D. Shop and Construction Drawings:
a. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electrical
equipment, as applicable.
b. Shop and construction drawings must demonstrate that the design
requirements are understood by indicating all equipment and
material proposed to be supplied and installed and by detailing
fabrication and installation methods proposed to be used. Shop and
construction drawings shall clearly state the name and location of
the work, the names of Engineer and Contractor, submission date.
c. Shop and construction drawings shall be submitted at a scale of 1:50
for general layout plans as approved by the Engineer for sections,
details, elevations, congested layouts, etc. Drawings shall include
but not be limited to the following:
 Details of electrical installations in conjunction with all trades
concerned, showing sleeves and openings for passage through floor
structure.
 Composite construction drawings fully dimensioned, in metric,
showing locations of cables, conduits, bus ducts, shafts, mechanical
and electrical equipment rooms, ceiling spaces and all other critical
locations.
 Plans showing equipment layouts including all details pertaining to
clearances, access, sleeves, electrical connections, location and
elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc.
 Plans, sections, and elevations of electrical spaces to illustrate
compliance with Standards for allocation of spaces for maintenance,
movement, installation, etc.
d. Single Line Diagrams: Detailed single line diagrams and control
schematics clearly indicating all equipment ratings, frame sizes,
cable sizes, nomenclature/identification number shall be submitted
for the Engineer’s approval. The SLD’s shall include the MV
network as applicable.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and arrange for certification by
manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized representative.
F. Installation shall be fully rated for the power source and load
characteristics as also for the fault conditions expected and protection
selectively coordinated for full discrimination, considering the different
manufacturers products used in the system.
G. Technical Literature: Include detailed manufacturers' specifications and
original catalogues or catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number,
application and operating criteria of all equipment and materials,
together with other information necessary to satisfy Engineer that
proposed equipment and systems are suitable and adequate.
H. List of Proposed Manufacturers: Of all equipment and materials,
including all items for which choice of manufacturer is at own
discretion, shall be submitted for approval.
I. Assembled Equipment: Any assembled equipment to be supplied for
the project shall be assembled by the manufacturer or his authorized
assembler. Submit the necessary documents to substantiate the above
including the assembler staff training, quality control, etc. The Engineer
reserves the right to reject any local assembler if the information
submitted is not sufficient. The Engineer's rejection in that respect is
final and not subject to discussion.
J. Test Certificates and Reports: Submit manufacturer's type and routine
test certificates and reports for equipment and devices. Complete test
results shall be submitted in clearly identified and organized booklets,
indicating item of equipment, make, model, type, date of tests, type of
tests, descriptions, and procedures. Include in the test reports the
Quality Assurance Certification, the standards to which the equipment
comply, and the standards to which the equipment was tested.
K. Factory Testing: Locally manufactured/assembled equipment shall
comply with the relevant standards recommendations and shall be
witnessed by Engineer, where required in the relevant Specifications
Section. If the manufacturer's test certificates/tests are not complying
with the standards, then independent laboratory tests shall be carried out
on equipment in accordance with the Specification and the Standards,
and as required by Engineer. The Engineer's requirements in that
respect are final and not subject to discussion.
L. Spare Parts Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemized schedules of
spare parts to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state
against each item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and
delivery to site.
M. Tools And Instruments Schedules: Submit with the Tender itemized
schedules of tools and instruments to be provided, as required by the
Specification, and state against each item the manufacturer's unit price
including packaging and delivery to site.
N. Labeling Schedule: Submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule
of all equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested details,
lettering, position, and fixing methods of each label indicating its
application.
O. Samples: Submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval.
Major items of equipment for which samples cannot be submitted shall
be demonstrated in existing installations or by manufacturer's
information, test certificates and reports.
P. As-Built (Record) Drawings: Prior to Substantial Completion, submit
Record Drawings certified by the Engineer on installed electrical
systems, in accordance with requirements of the Specification. The As-
Built (Record) Drawings, where applicable, shall include data on
existing works. The As-Built Records shall be made progressively as
the Work proceeds.
Q. Submit CVs of electrical Engineers, electrical personnel, and quality
personnel, for Engineer’s review and approval.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in
manufacturing switchgear similar to those indicated for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer’s Certification: The manufacturer shall be specialized in
manufacturing of electric products of types and sizes required, and
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a
minimum of 5 years documented experience and shall have a
nationwide first party service organization. The manufacturer shall be
ISO 9001 certified and shall design to internationally accepted standard.
C. Materials and Assemblies: All materials and parts comprising the
Electric equipment shall be new, and have not been in prior service,
except as required during factory testing. All active electronic devices
shall be solid state and not exceed the manufacturers recommended
specified tolerances for temperature or current to ensure maximum
reliability. All semiconductor devices shall be sealed. The manufacturer
shall conduct inspection on incoming parts, modular assemblies, and
final products.
D. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment
manufacturer has a locally established and authorized organization
which can be called upon for professional advice and maintenance as
may be required, and which can immediately supply spare parts to
support day to day and emergency maintenance requirements. Failure
to satisfy Engineer may disqualify a manufacturer.
E. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances,
and regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities having
jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.
F. Standards: Equipment and component parts shall comply with the
following Standards:
 Egyptian Electricity Authority Technical Specifications for 24 KV
Switch Board.
 Common Clauses for MV Switchgear and Control Gear Standards: IEC
62271-1.
 A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control Gear for Rated Voltages
above 1 Kv and up to and including 52 kV: IEC 62271-200.
 MV A.C. Circuit Breakers: IEC 62271-100.
 Insulation Coordination: IEC 60071.
 MV A.C. switch-fuse combinations: IEC 62271-105.
 A.C. Disconnectors (isolators) and Earthing Switches: IEC 62271-102.
 MV Switches for rated voltages above 1 kV and less than 52 kV: IEC
62271-103.
 Surge Arrestors: IEC 60099.
 Metering and Protective Current Transformers (CTs): IEC 61869-2.
 Metering and Protective voltage Transformers (VTs): IEC 61869-3.
 Protection and measuring relays: IEC 60255.
 Reading Instruments: IEC 60051.
 Watt-Hour Meters: IEC 62052-11, 62053-11, 62053-22 and 60051.
 Power Transformers: IEC 60076.
 Sulfur Hexa-Fluoride: IEC 60376.
 Fuses: IEC 60282-1.
 Climate Conditions: IEC 60721-3-3 and 60721-3-4.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide complete system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer,
and Contractor are jointly and severally liable and agree to repair or
replace all defective components of the warranted item. Warranty shall
include both, materials and workmanship, warranty shall include:
 Defective materials and installation.
 Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
 Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
 Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
 Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering and use.
 Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
 Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed
and that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective items.
Coordinate with Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent
disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not cancelled due to the
repair work.
B. Warranty Period: two years from the date of the substantial completion
of the project.
1.10 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Availability: Confirm availability of equipment and materials
proposed for use in the work prior to submission for approval. If, after
approval, equipment or materials cease to be available, submit
alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.
B. Acceptance by Authority: Confirm that proposed equipment and
material characteristics where required are compatible with the
requirements of the Local Power Authority or other Authorities having
jurisdiction and are acceptable to them. Inform Engineer of any
modifications necessary to comply with the Local Power Authority's
requirements.
C. Manufacturers' Standards: Equipment shall be the latest standard
product of the manufacturer. Component parts shall be the product of
a single manufacturer, unless otherwise approved and provided that
components made by other manufacturers are of a standard design and
are interchangeable.
D. Approved Manufacturers: Listing of approved manufacturers in the
Specification does not necessarily constitute approval of their standard
products as equal to those specified. Ascertain that listed
manufacturers are able to supply equipment and material in conformity
with the Specification.
E. Factory Assembly: Equipment generally shall be supplied in complete
factory assemble units ready for installation on site. Dis-assembly
necessary for transportation or other purposes shall be arranged to limit
site work to simple reassembly and inter-wiring of control and power
cabling.
F. Storage of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be stored in an
approved location, under cover, free from humidity, dust, debris, and
rodents. Equipment sensitive to heat and humidity shall be kept in
climatically conditioned areas until installed and handed over.
G. Defective Equipment: The Employer reserves the right to operate
operable defective equipment during the Defects Liability Period until
it can be removed from service for repair or replacement.
H. Spare Parts: Not later than the date of substantial completion, provide
spare parts required by the Specification, together with suitable means
of identifying, storing, and securing same.
I. Tools and Instruments: Not later than the date of substantial
completion, provide sets of tools and instruments required by the
Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing, and
securing same.
J. Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control, and electrical
devices etc. to indicate duty, service, or function, to the satisfaction of
Engineer. Labels shall be laminated anodized aluminum discs with
black surface and white core with incised lettering in English.
Alternative methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Fix
labels with noncorrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent
permanent surfaces or as approved by Engineer.
K. Systems used before substantial completion shall have all consumable
elements, such as lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced by new,
within 7 days prior to the date of substantial completion.
L. All panels and electrical boards shall have designs permitting easy
access of internal components for maintenance and replacement
without disturbing other components. All equipment shall be designed
for easy and simple operation.
M. Contractor shall be responsible to define the necessary power supplies,
taking into account the installed load of chosen equipment and final
condition of installation, as well as any other considerations as to allow
the proper operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
1. GENERAL
A. Refer to electric guidelines and basic electrical materials and methods
sections
B. MV cables shall be single or multi conductor types, with types and
sizes as indicated, and conforming to IEC Standard 60502 " Extruded
Solid Dielectric Insulated Power Cables for rated voltages from 1 kV
to 52 kV" and IEC 60332-3-24 and as specified in particulars below.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MV CABLE
A. Three Core MV Cable, 18/30 (36) kV, XLPE insulated, for use on
systems with voltages between 22 kV and 36 kV, shall comply with IEC
60502 and IEC 60332-3-24, and have the following characteristics:
a. Conductor: Aluminum, circular, stranded, and compacted.
b. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
c. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), nominal
8mm thick.
d. Insulation Screen Part: Non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-
conducting material, readily strippable.
e. Metallic Part: Layer of copper tape applied with 30% overlap,
copper wire or combination of both, with equivalent cross-sectional
area of 25 mm2 for cables up to 240 mm2 and 35 mm2 for larger
cables as a minimum, DC resistance of the screen shall be measured
on the complete cable and the resistance value corrected to 20 deg.C
in accordance with IEC 60228 and shall not exceed the relevant
value of BS 6622.
f. Filling and Bedding: Extruded PVC to form compact circular
bedding.
g. Armor where required: Single layer of round galvanized steel wire
or double galvanized steel tape.
h. Outer Sheath: Extruded PVC (color Black) type ST2 to IEC 60502,
flame retardant to IEC 60332-3-24.
i. Medium voltage cables shall be color coded using colored tape
applied under the metallic shield.
j. Phase colors shall be red, yellow, blue or use color coding in
accordance with local regulations and standards.
k. Embossing: Electric cable, manufacturer name, number of cores and
size, type (e.g. AL/XLPE/SWA/PVC), voltage rating (e.g. 18/30
(36) kV), manufacturer standards.

Medium voltage cables
l. Short-circuit: 17.5 kA (minimum) for one second rating for 185
mm2 Aluminum cables, 22.5 kA (minimum) for one second for 240
mm2 Aluminum cables, 37.5. Ka (minimum) for one second for 400
mm2 Aluminum cables.
B. Single Core MV Cable (36 kV maximum between phases), XLPE -
insulated, for use on systems with voltages between 22 kV and 36 kV,
shall comply with IEC 60502 and IEC 60332-1-2, and have the
following characteristics:
a. Conductor: Aluminum, circular, stranded, and compacted.
b. Conductor Screen: Extruded semi-conducting layer.
c. Insulation: Extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), nominal 8
mm thick.
d. Copper Screen: Layer of copper wires with copper tape applied in
opposite direction bedding, with equivalent cross-sectional area of
25 mm2 for cables up to 240 mm2 and 35 mm2 for larger cables as
a minimum, DC resistance of the screen shall be measured on the
complete cable and the resistance value corrected to 20 deg. C in
accordance with IEC 60228 and shall not exceed the relevant value
of BS 6622. Inner tape covering and separation sheath of extruded
PVC.
e. Armored cable, where required, shall have single layer of aluminum
wire or two layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over-
sheath.
f. Outer Sheath: Extruded PVC (color Black) type ST2 to IEC 60502
and IEC 60332-1-2.
g. Medium voltage cables shall be color coded using colored tape
applied under the metallic shield, Phase colors shall be red, yellow,
blue or use color coding in accordance with local regulations and
standards.
h. Embossing: Electric cable, manufacturer name, number of cores and
size, type, voltage rating (e.g. 18/30 (36) kV), manufacturer
standards.
2.2 CABLE TERMINATION AND SPLICE CONNECTORS
A. Type: Cable termination and splice connectors shall comply with IEC
61238-1 and tested in accordance with IEC 61442 and IEC 60502-4,
IEC 60137, and BS EN 50181 for elbow termination connectors.
B. Termination and splicing kits shall be either heat shrinkable, cold
shrinkable or pre-molded type.
C. Kits shall include stress control filler and tube, extruded leakage
insulating mastic between cable and shield ground braid, seal and outer
non tracking tubes. Non tracking skirts shall be provided for installation

in outdoor or wet areas. Kits shall be suitable for cable size and include
necessary termination lugs and sleeves.
D. Connectors shall be compression, barrel crimped type and should be
performed by suitable hydraulic or mechanical tool equipped with
specially designed dies, producing a low resistance contact with a good
mechanical grip.
E. Connectors for aluminum conductors shall be made of aluminum alloy
of purity not less than 99.5%.
F. Pre-molded joints shall be factory molded in the shape that it will take
when installed. The molded layers of the joint housing (inner semi-
conductive layer, insulation layer and outer semi-conductive shielded
layer) shall be integrated during the molded injection process. pre-
molded components offered shall comply with IEC 60502-4. The main
pre-molded joint body shall be applied on the insulation prepared
surfaces of the cables and connected to their external insulation
semiconductor creating a tight circumferential interface ensuring the
seal from moisture and dust or pollution during the complete service
life of the accessories.
G. Pre-molded termination shall be factory molded. A set of termination
components shall be made of hydrophobic, non-flammable, fungus
resistant Pre- molded EPDM rubber or silicon and shall comply with
IEC 60502-4 standard. The termination body once applied or slipped
on the cable shall be fitted to create a tight circumferential interface
ensuring the seal from moisture and dust or pollution. Termination shall
resist the environmental conditions (UV rays, dust, moisture etc.).
H. All termination and splice connectors specified above shall be tin plated
with minimum thickness of 5 microns for copper material and 7 microns
for aluminum material. Aluminum connectors shall incorporate neutral
grease to avoid aluminum oxidation.
I. Termination connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist
of barrel made of aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5% and
palm made of forged copper connected using a friction stir welding.
J. Splice connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist of two
barrels, one is made of electrolytic copper and the other is made of
aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5% connected using a friction
stir welding.
K. Splice connectors shall have a central stop to divide the connector into
two equal parts to facilitate the correct cable positioning.
L. Connectors shall be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints
equal to cable in characteristics, in terms of insulation, stress
distribution and watertightness. Materials and methods of jointing shall
be approved before confirmation of order.

M. Load break switch / ring main unit connectors shall be screened Elbow
type 630amp, type-C according EN-50180 and EN-50181, housing
shall be factory molded in the shape that it will take when installed. The
molded layers of the elbow housing (inner semi-conductive layer,
insulation layer and outer semi-conductive shielded layer) shall be
integrated during the molded injection process and made of ethylene
propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber or silicon and earthed
surface in all service environments as in the presence of moisture in
high humidity areas and of dust.
N. Connector insulation: Connectors shall be insulated using proper
material including insulated sleeves, boots, bushing… etc. as
applicable.
O. All components of lugs and connectors shall be clearly marked with the
manufacturer’s name, die number, cable / conductor size, number of
crimps and position.
2.3 CABLE CLEATS
A. Cable cleats shall be classified, tested, and certified according to IEC
61914.
B. Cleats shall be made of made of Aluminum, withstand temperature
range -5o C - +60o C, classified as “Very heavy” (20 J impact energy
at 400mm height as minimum) for their resistance to impact and shall
withstand electromechanical forces for more than one short circuit.
Cleat short circuit rating for both RMS and Peak values shall exceed the
design short circuit level at project site.
C. Cleats shall be trefoil type for single core cables and round type for
multi core cables, selected to suit the installed cable(s) outer diameter
and shall be provided with low smoke zero halogen pad/liner for cable
mounting and protection.
D. Cable cleat edges shall be free of sharp edges, burrs and cracks and shall
not cause any damage to the cable sheath in the event of short circuit.
E. Cleats shall be suitable for support to racks, trays or ladders using single
or double bolt fixation along with necessary fixation accessories.
F. All cleats shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s name,
product identification or type and cable outer diameter range.
2.4 CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING
A. Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate
manufacturer's lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it must
be made inside boxes, handholes or manholes.
B. Recommendations: Through joints and terminations shall be carried out
strictly in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations, and

made with correct specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or
mixtures, stress cones, glands, and bonds as applicable.
C. Jointing: Qualifications of operatives shall be submitted to Engineer
prior to work commencing on site. Joints shall be filled with epoxy resin
after taping unless contrary to cable manufacturer's recommendations.
Sample site constructed cable terminations and through-joints shall be
submitted to the Engineer prior to commencing work on site. Samples
shall be constructed in the presence of the Engineer and shall be
available for test and inspection in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables shall be purpose made,
to prevent damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of MV
cables.
E. Cleaning of lacquer on conductors shall be by use of 'Scotch Brite'
sponge and white spirit or equal approved.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals including screws and bolts,
in accordance with manufacturers published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with international standards.

C. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. Conductors: cables shall be stranded for sections 4 mm2 and above for
copper and 10 mm2 for aluminum, based on IEC 60228 Class 2. Signal and
control cables shall have solid conductors unless otherwise specified.
Flexible cords shall have finely stranded conductors. Conductors of single-
core cables 25-mm2 and above shall be compacted. Multi-core cables 35-
mm2 and above shall be sectorial shape.
C. Low voltage cables, cable terminations and building wiring insulation shall
be color coded or otherwise identified as required by the Regulations and
as follows:
 Neutral shall be black.
 Protective earth shall be green/yellow striped.
 Phase colors shall be red, yellow, blue or use color coding in accordance
with local regulations and standards.
D. Maintain color coding throughout installation. Phase-conductors for which
outer jacket is not color-coded shall have engraved alphanumeric mark
(L1, L2, L3) or color-coded heat- shrinkable sleeves.
E. Buried Cables (where required): Cables buried directly in the ground shall
be armored type.
F. Outdoor cables (where required) exposed to sunlight shall be provided with
ultraviolet resistant PVC sheath having 2.5% black carbon content.
2. PRODUCT
2.1 LV WIRES AND CABLES
A. Single Core PVC Insulated Non-Sheathed Cables: Unless otherwise
specified, single conductor cables for wiring in conduit shall have
annealed copper conductors, compacted, generally with concentric
strands and insulated with flame retardant insulation to IEC 60332-1,
moisture, and heat resistant PVC/E to IEC 60227-1 and 3, suitable for
wet locations and for conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Wires and
cables shall be 450/750 V grade.
B. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have aluminum
conductors, compacted, insulated with PVC/A to IEC 60502-1,
moisture, and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor
Low voltage cables
temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler, and
sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST2. Cables shall comply with IEC
60332-3, and IEC 60811.
C. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Cables (0.6/1 kV): To have annealed,
copper conductors, compacted, insulated with PVC/A to IEC 60502-1,
moisture and heat resistant, suitable for wet locations and conductor
temperatures of 70 deg. C, laid up, bedded with suitable filler and
sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST2. Armored cables shall have
single layer of galvanized steel wire armor or double tape armor.
Cables shall comply with IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.
D. Single Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Single-core
circular stranded aluminum conductors, compacted, insulated with
moisture and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable
for wet locations and conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C. and flame
retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheath. Cables shall comply with IEC 60502-
1, IEC 60332-3, and IEC 60811.
E. Multi-Core XLPE Insulated Feeder Cables (0.6/1 kV): Multicore
aluminum conductors, compacted, XLPE insulated, for conductor
temperature of 90 deg. C, laid up and bedded with suitable non-
hygroscopic material compatible with the insulation. Armored cables
shall have single layer of galvanized steel wire armor or double tape
armor with flame retardant PVC/ST2 over-sheathed, color black., color
black. Cables shall comply with IEC 60502-1, IEC 60332-3, and IEC
60811.
F. Multi-core shall be of reduced neutral where the triple harmonic
content (third harmonic current or multiples of the third harmonic) of
the connected load is less than 15% of the fundamental line current in
compliance with the latest edition of BS7671 (IET – Wiring
Regulations) and IEC 61000. Otherwise, four core cables shall be used.
The 3 core cables with reduced neutral shall be considered for the
following conductors sizes, in accordance with BS7671 (IET – Wiring
Regulations):
 Greater than 16 mm2 for copper.
 Greater than 25 mm2 for aluminum.
G. Where required, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H) Cables: 600/1000
V grade, copper conductor, compacted, insulated with extruded
material to IEC 61034 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1 for
halogen acid gas content and IEC 60754-2 for degree of acidity of
evolved gas. Cores and cross-sectional area shall be as shown on the
Drawings. Phases shall be color coded in conformity with the
Standards, and overall cable sheath shall be extruded black LS0H
material. Cables shall comply with IEC 60332-3.

Low voltage cables
H. Fire resistant LS0H Cable: Single core stranded plain annealed copper
conductors to IEC 60228, fire resistant insulation category CWZ to BS
6387 for sizes up to 6 mm2, PH60 classified to BS EN 50200, and 60
minutes rating when tested in accordance with BS 8434-2 when tested
in 20 mm rigid steel conduit and Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H)
composite sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1.
Cable shall comply with IEC 60332-1 and 3 (category B) for flame
retardant properties. Cable shall comply with BS EN 50363 and rated
450/750 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, operating
conductor temperature of 90 deg. C.
I. Cable shall be LPCB, BASEC or other equivalent certification, audited
and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall be used as
branch circuits installed in exposed in steel conduits above false ceiling
or installed embedded in PVC conduits inside walls / concrete for use
in central battery system, smoke curtains, motorized smoke dampers,
fire control panels, and other similar loads.
J. Fire resistant LS0H Cable: Multi core plain annealed copper
conductors to IEC 60228 (in sizes up to 6 mm2), fire resistant
insulation, galvanized steel wire armored, category CWZ to BS 6387,
PH 120 classified to BS EN 50200, and 60 minutes rating when tested
in accordance with BS 8434-2 and complying with BS EN 50363,
laminated aluminum screen bonded to the sheath and LS0H composite
sheath with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire to IEC 61034
and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable shall comply with IEC
60332-1 and 3 (category B) for flame retardant properties. Cable shall
be rated 300/500 V, capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV,
operating conductor temperature of 70 deg. C. Cable shall be LPCB,
BASEC or other equivalent certification, audited and marked by
embossing on cable sheath. Cable shall be used for fire alarm, voice
evacuation installations, emergency voice communication systems,
and other similar loads requiring category 2 and 3 circuits in
accordance with BS 8519.
K. Fire resistant LS0H Cable 600/1000 V: Multi core plain copper
stranded circular or shaped conductor (sizes up to 400 mm2)
complying with IEC 60228 with fire resistant insulation category F60
to BS 7846 and tested in accordance with BS 8491 and complying with
BS EN 50363 operating conductor temperature 90ºC, single galvanized
steel tape armor and extruded low smoke zero halogen (LS0H) over
sheath wire to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1. Cable
shall comply with IEC 60332-1 and 3 (category C) for flame retardant
properties. Cable shall be LPCB, BASEC or other equivalent
certification, audited and marked by embossing on cable sheath. Cable
shall be used for feeders of the smoke and pressurizing fans,
Low voltage cables
firefighting elevators, and other firefighting and life safety loads
requiring category 2and3 circuits in accordance with BS 8519
including buildings with evacuation time higher than 30 minutes, such
as high assembly and high-rise buildings.
2.2 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLES
A. Multi-Core PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5
mm2, 2.5 mm2 or stranded 4 mm2 plain circular copper conductors,
with heat resistive PVC/A to IEC 60502- 1, rated for 70 deg. C, of 7,
12, 19, 24, 30 or 37 cores. Cores shall be laid up together and filled
with non-hygroscopic material, and covered with copper wire or tape
screen and over sheathed with flame retardant PVC/ST1, to form
compact and circular cable for use in switchgear, control gear and
generally for control of power and lighting systems. Armored cable
shall have extruded PVC bedding which may be an integral part of the
filling, galvanized steel tape wire armoring, and over-sheath of flame
retardant PVC/ST1 to IEC 60502-1 and IEC 60332-1, color black.
Core identification shall be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. over
black insulation.
B. Fire resistant Cables shall be certified to have passed IEC 60331 fire
resistance and IEC 60332-1 flame retardance and reduced flame
propagation to category CWZ of BS 6387.
C. PE insulated control and signal cables, for use on data systems, shall
be generally 300 V rating, polyethylene insulated, color-coded, tinned
copper conductors (0.6-mm diameter), twisted together into pairs.
Multi-pair core assembly shall be covered with binder tape, spirally
wound 0.075-mm bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain
wire and overall PVC sheath.
D. Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with
power cables, shall be insulated for same voltage grade.
E. Multi core PVC insulated cables (300/500 V) annealed copper
conductors, solid conductors, up to 4 mm2 unless otherwise indicated,
insulated with moisture and heat resistant PVC/C to IEC 60227 and
with over sheath of flame redundant PVC type ST1 to IEC 60227 and
IEC 60332-1.
2.3 TERMINATION AND SPLICE CONNECTORS (LV POWER)
A. Connector terminations and splices shall be of class A to IEC 61238-
1.
B. Connectors shall be compression, barrel crimped type.
C. Connectors for copper conductors shall be made of electrolytic copper.
D. Connectors for aluminum conductors shall be made of aluminum alloy
of purity not less than 99.5%.
Low voltage cables
E. All termination and splice connectors specified above shall be tin
plated with minimum thickness of 5 microns for copper material and 7
microns for aluminum material. Aluminum connectors shall
incorporate neutral grease to avoid aluminum oxidation.
F. Termination connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist
of barrel made of aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5% and
palm made of forged copper connected using a friction stir welding.
G. Splice connectors for aluminum-copper termination shall consist of
two barrels, one is made of electrolytic copper and the other is made of
aluminum alloy of purity not less than 99.5% connected using a friction
stir welding.
H. Splice connectors shall have a central stop to divide the connector into
two equal parts to facilitate the correct cable positioning.
I. Connectors shall be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints
equal to cable in characteristics, in terms of insulation, stress
distribution and watertightness. Materials and methods of jointing shall
be approved before confirmation of order.
J. Connectors shall be suitable for cable size used.
K. Connector - Type A-1: Heat shrinkable or cold shrinkable for making
T-taps and splices on conductors used in external lighting fittings
connections.
L. Connector - Type A-2: Pressure indent type, for terminating or making
T-taps and splices on conductors 10 mm2 and smaller. Connector shall
be non-ferrous copper alloy applied to conductor by mechanical
crimping pressure, with vinyl insulating sleeves or phenolic insulating
covers.
M. Connector - Type A-3: Bolted pressure split type for terminating or
making T-taps and splices on conductors 16 mm2 and larger.
Connector shall be cast non-ferrous copper alloy applied to conductor
by clamping with minimum of two screws and provided with phenolic
insulating cover.
N. Connector - Type B-1: pre-insulated, spring type, for branch circuit and
fixture wiring.
O. Connector shall be steel encased spring with shell, insulated with vinyl
cap and skirt.
P. All components of lugs and connectors shall be clearly marked with
the manufacturer’s name, die number, cable / conductor size, number
of crimps and position.
Q. Contractor to follow the instructions of manufacturers according to the
catalogues to ensure proper termination/connection of the aluminum
cables.
R. Cable terminals to be covered during connection making to protect it
against humidity.
Low voltage cables
S. Cable cross-section area shall be in circular shape to ensure proper use
with cable lugs and connectors.
T. Cable lugs and connectors to be compressed using hydraulic piston
according to cable size with taking into consideration the number of
compressions to be according to according to their lengths (in
accordance with instructions of manufacturers).
2.4 CABLE GLANDS
A. Cable glands shall comply with BS 6121-1, BS 6121, and BS EN
50262.
B. Cable glands used with unarmored cables shall be made of brass, type
A2 to BS 6121, and an environmental seal to the cable outer sheath.
Glands shall be deluge protected, with IP65 degree of protection to IEC
60529.
C. Cable glands used with single steel tape armored cables shall be made
of brass, type CW to BS 6121, electrical continuity via armor wire
termination, earth tag to BS EN 50262 and an environmental seal to
the cable outer sheath. Glands shall have IP65 degree of protection to
IEC 60529.
D. Cable glands used with steel tape or wire braid armor shall have similar
characteristics as specified in paragraph 2.6C except gland type which
shall be CX instead of CW to BS 6121.
E. Aluminum cable glands shall be used for cables with aluminum wire
armor. Glands shall have same applicable characteristics according to
cable type as above.
F. Cable glands used with LS0H, or fire-resistant cables shall be of the
applicable type as stated above and provided with low smoke fume
shroud.
G. Cable glands shall be suitable for cable size used.

Low voltage cables
D. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. Provide a common earth termination network for building all services,
consisting of bonding earthing networks of all individual services. The
resistance to earth should, in this case be the lowest value needed for any
of the individual services. Combined resistance to ground of the whole
network is not to exceed 1 Ohms and 2 ohms for electric\package
substation. Site testes shall be made to ascertain that the electrode system
resistance meets this requirement
C. Testing joints (test links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on
each main earthing conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth
electrode/earthing loop. Location of test link shall be approved by the
Engineer.
D. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive
parts of the building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service
pipes and ducting, metallic conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable
armor to nearest earthing terminals by equipotential bonding conductors.
Cross-section of protective bonding conductor shall not be less than half of
the protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with a
minimum of 4-mm2.
E. Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and
any other metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential
bonding conductors to main earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are
to be as short as practicable between point of entry/exit of services and
main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be made on
the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be
less than half that of the earthing conductor connected thereto, and
minimum 6 mm2.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRODES
A. Earth electrode is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected
by buried earthing tape or cable; distance between two rods is not to be
less than twice the length of one rod driven depth.

Grounding and bonding for electrical systems
B. Ring type earth electrode consisting of earthing conductors, in a closed
loop, buried at a depth of 0.5 m and a distance of about 1 m around
external walls. Connect all earthing conductors to this ring. Additional
earth rods connecting with the earth ring are to be provided, as
necessary, to bring down earth electrode resistance to the specified
value.
C. Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other
material which exhibits mechanical strength, electrical continuity
between sections and does not give rise to electrolytic or corrosive
action. All coupling units shall be the same length of threaded length
of the rod.
D. Earth rods shall be a minimum length of 3 meters and shall be driven
into the ground using a suitable mechanical hammer. The tops of the
rods shall be driven below ground level to suit the inspection pit.
E. The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made
concrete pit to facilitate inspection. The pit shall be provided with a lid
and the assembly shall be flush with ground level.
F. All copper cables shall be connected 120 mm from the top of the earth
rod with a purpose made of thermo weld.
G. Parallel connected earth rods shall be spaced at a horizontal distance
equal to their buried length. They shall be connected with bare 120
mm² stranded copper cable, buried not less than 400 mm below ground
level.
H. Copper stranded cable may be installed in the same trenches as LV
cables but shall be separated from all other cables and services by a
distance not less than 300 mm.
2.2 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
A. Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and
electrode system shall be green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper
cable.
B. A minimum of two earthing conductors shall be installed and
separately connected to the main earth bar with bolted test links of
copper and having a cross section equal to the main earth bar.
2.3 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL
A. The main earthing terminal shall consist of hard drawn copper to IEC,
DIN/VDE Standards BS 1432 formed into a bar having minimum
dimensions as detailed in the earthing schematic.
B. Main earthing bar is to be provided at point of service entrance or
medium voltage, transformer, generator, low voltage, low current, and
mechanical distribution rooms; as described in the Specification.
Connect all earthing conductors, protective conductors and bonding
conductors to the main earthing bar. Provide two insulated main
earthing conductors, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing
joints to the earth electrode [at two separate earth pits. Conductor is to
be sized to carry maximum earth fault current of system at point of
application with final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C
for at 1 second for medium voltage systems and 0.4 seconds for low
voltage systems. Main earthing conductors are to be minimum 120
mm2.
C. Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the
finished floor level and spaced by means of insulators not less than 50
mm from the fixing surface.
D. The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar
width. Where this is not possible then the connection shall be made to
a copper flag welded to the earthing bar.
E. Each connection to the main earthing terminal shall be identified with
an appropriately worded label made of durable material.
2.4 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A. Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars
and the main earthing terminal or bar, Where protective conductor is
common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective
conductor is to be the largest of the conductor sizes or shall be made
with 120 mm² stranded copper insulated cables. Cables shall be
connected to remote ends of the equipment earthing terminals or bar
and separately connected to the main earthing terminal or bar.
B. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit.
C. Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking,
ducting or the like. Where armored cable is specified and armor is steel,
it may be used as a protective conductor, if approved.
D. Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective
conductor from one piece of equipment to another is not permitted.
Extraneous and exposed conductive parts of equipment are not to be
used as protective conductors but are to be connected by bolted clamp
type connectors and/or brazing to continuous protective conductors
which are to be insulated by molded materials.
E. Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these
shall be green/yellow PVC covered and installed on a galvanized cable
tray and fixed with purpose made cleats.
F. Connections between main earthing terminal or bars, equipment
earthing terminals… etc., and stranded copper cables shall be made
with appropriate compression type lug, bolt, nut, and lock washers.
Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned.

G. Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or
other items which come into direct contact with copper protective
conductors bars, strips, cables…etc., shall be non-ferrous and
manufactured from brass, bronze or other suitable conducting material
which will not cause electrolytic or other corrosion. Where connections
occur between copper and galvanized structures, contact surfaces shall,
additionally, be tinned and after completion compounded
H. to exclude moisture. Protective conductors, cables, strip, bars, lugs…
etc., shall be installed in visible and serviceable positions.
I. The joints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting
point of at least 600 deg.C. The amount of overlap between the two
strips to be jointed shall not be less than the width of the larger
conductor.
3. MV DISTRIBUTOR ROOM GROUNDING

A. All exposed conductive parts of the distributer should be solidly earthed
through 1 test link per section (each distributer shall have two test link).
B. At least a no. of 4 earthing rods should be installed guaranteeing a total
earthing resistance of 2Ω max.
C. Distributer auxiliary transformer should be solidly earthed via at least 3
earthing rods guaranteeing a total earthing resistance of 2Ω max.
D. Auxiliary transformer earthing system should be totally separate from the
distributer earthing system by a distance equal to double the rods burial
depth.
E. Exposed conductive parts of the auxiliary transformer dedicated RMU
should be earthed to the distributer earthing system through 1 test link.
F. Earthing bits should be distributed regularly at a distance 60 cm far from
the distributer building walls.
4. RING MAIN UNIT (RMU) ROOM GROUNDING

A. Exposed conductive parts of the RMU should be solidly earthed through 1
test link.
B. A total earthing resistance of 2Ω max. should be guaranteed.
5. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS AND KIOSKS

GROUNDING
A. All exposed conductive parts should be solidly earthed via at least 3
earthing rods guaranteeing a total earthing resistance of 5Ω max.
B. Earthing rods should be regularly arranged by a distance apart equal to the
burial depth of the rod and at 60 cm far from the kiosk.

E. LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. Provide lightning protection risk assessment calculations as required by the
local and international codes.
C. Submit data for air terminals, fasteners, test links earth point and rods,
connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any accessories forming part of the
lightning protective system.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 Submittals
A. Calculations: Provide lightning protection risk assessment calculations
as required by the local and international codes.
B. Product Data: Submit data for air terminals, fasteners, test links earth
point and rods, connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any accessories
forming part of the lightning protective system.
2.2 Lightning Protection System Components
A. Provide lightning protection system materials and components that
comply with IEC 62561 and with approved manufacturer's standard
design, in accordance with published product information and the
Standards specified in this Section.
B. Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors,
conductor straps, fasteners, earthing plates, earthing rods, rod clamps,
splicers and other components required for a complete system that
meets the Standards specified in this Section.
C. Roof Conductors: 70 mm2 soft drawn stranded copper cable covered
with PVC of approved color or bare, high conductivity, annealed
copper strip, 25 x 3 mm.
D. Bonding Conductors: High conductivity, bare annealed copper tape, 20
x 3 mm minimum dimensions, or 50 mm2 soft drawn stranded copper
cable covered with PVC of approved color.
E. Earth Rod: 16 mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of
high tensile strength (600 N/mm2), with 99.99% pure electrolytic
copper molecularly bonded into steel core, 0.25 mm minimum
thickness
 Driving Head: High strength steel.

Lightning protection for structures
 Couplings: Long length silicon bronze, internally threaded.
 Threads: Rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of copper and
strength.
 Minimum Length of Rod: 2.4 m.
F. Inspection (Earth) Pit: Precast concrete construction, with heavy duty
cover and brass plate engraved 'Earth Pit Below' inset in cover.
 Provide one pit for each earth rod.
G. Accessories: Supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links, etc.,
shall be copper or copper alloy and specially manufactured for the
purpose. Clamps and connectors shall be specifically designed and
sized for clamping and connecting to the various shapes and surfaces
of bonded metalwork. Provide bimetallic connectors between different
materials. Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws and bolts will not be
accepted on copper installations.
H. Flexible Bonding Straps: Flexible annealed copper braid, 20 x 3 mm,
suitable for bonding flat surfaces, cut to length required and with
drilled flat terminals for bolted connections. Provide special bimetallic
alloy terminals for joining to aluminum conductive parts.
I. Down Conductors: High conductivity, copper tape 25 x 3 mm or 70
mm2 soft drawn stranded copper cable, bare as shown or covered with
PVC.
J. Test Links: Two-bolt split-coupling, copper alloy, made to join two
ends of down conductor specified.
K. Surge Protection Device (SPD): containing at least one non-linear
component intended to limit transient overvoltage and divert surge
currents.
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Flat Concrete Roofed Buildings Air Termination Network: Provide
horizontal conductors around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges
of roofs that are higher than adjacent parts, unless they fall in zone of
protection of a higher conductor. Install horizontal conductors in a mesh of
proper size for the protection level required. Join all elements of lightning
protective system together. Additionally, provide air termination
horizontal loops around building façade for structures above 60m and
120m as per the standard requirement; bonded to steel reinforcement and
exposed metal parts as specified and required by the standard.
B. Install horizontal conductors in a mesh of proper size for the protection
level required on the roof floor, and to be bonded / connected to the
aluminum coping covering the roof parapets and upper structures. Join all
elements of lightning protective system together.

C. Additionally, provide lateral air termination network around building
façade via the use of horizontal copper ring conductor (bare copper tape
25mm x 3mm) installed on concrete slab embedded in the wall plaster, with
aluminum strike pads which shall be distributed along the facade of the
building with a maximum spacing of 5 meters. These strike pads shall be
connected to the ring conductor. The ring conductors shall be bonded /
connected to the down conductors, steel reinforcement and exposed metal
parts as specified and required by the standard.
D. Use Air Rods (Finials/Terminals) in the air termination network,
dimensions as per the code requirements; as necessary.
E. Down Conductors: Connect air termination network to earth via steel
reinforcement of concrete structure or via Peripheral/External Down
Conductors, at the positions shown on Drawings and in conformity with
specified Standards for down conductors. Ensure good contact between
reinforcing bars during construction, by fixing the bars with tying wire, for
both vertical to vertical bars, and horizontal to vertical bars.
F. Peripheral/External Down Conductors: Spaced as per relevant protection
class, Every down conductor shall:
 Have test link above earth for testing earth termination network.
 Be protected against corrosion.
 Terminate in an earth electrode (horizontal or vertical as per design
requirements).
 Be insulated and installed in PVC conduit from test link to electrode
connection point (to reduce potential gradient at earth level which
otherwise would be lethal to humans or animals).
G. Have lateral connection of down conductors (intermediate level ring
conductors) at earth level and at proper intervals on building façade as per
standard requirements.
H. Add extra internal down conductors every 40m in large and flat structures
with dimensions exceeding four times the spacing between down
conductors
I. Earth Termination: Provide exposed earth bonding points, inset into
concrete base of every column above earth level, bonded internally to
reinforcing bars and externally to the earth electrode "Grounding and
Bonding"). Securely bond earth bonding points to reinforcing bars using
bar clamps and provide high quality copper terminal plate with at least 4
threaded studs for bonding and for isolating foundation system for testing.
J. Provide reference earth electrode for testing purposes. It shall be possible
to completely isolate this electrode from the earth termination network for
testing footing/earth ring resistance at various positions. This electrode
shall be provided in an earth pit with special marking.

K. Bonding: Bond all metalwork in or on outside of structure to the lightning
protection system roof conductors or to exposed earthing points bonded to
reinforcing bars in the structure. Metalwork includes but is not necessarily
limited to: water pipes, tanks, sign structure, communication supports,
metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, vents, exterior
metal staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, doors or door frames
and main earthing terminal or bar of electrical installations.
L. Bond metal leaving or entering a structure (having system continuity such
as water piping, etc.), as follows:
 As directly as possible to the earth termination.
 Near point at which service enters or leaves the structure.
 At nearest earth point or at nearest main earthing terminal or bar of
protective earthing system.
M. If direct bonding is not acceptable by authorities and/or parties concerned,
SPDs shall be used.
N. Test Links: provide a test joint on each down conductor at the connection
of the earth termination, (except when reinforced steel inside columns is
used as natural down conductor).
O. Surge Protection Devices where specified or required shall be as follows:
a. SPD’s test requirements shall be compliant with
 IEC 61643-11 for power systems,
 IEC 61643-21 for telecommunication and signaling systems.
b. Selection and installation of a coordinated SPD protection shall comply
with:
 IEC 61643-12 and IEC 60364-5-53 for protection of power systems,
 IEC 61643-22 for protection of telecommunications and signaling
systems.
c. Unless otherwise indicated, following are typical applications for using
various types of SPDs
 SPD type I+II: Main distribution boards.
 SPD type II: Sub distribution boards.
 SPD type III: Terminal equipment.
d. Install lightning protection components and systems according to IEC
62305.

F. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS AND RING MAIN
UNITS
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. The switchgear cubicles and interrupters shall be factory assembled and
type tested. All switchgear components should be provided according to
the latest Egyptian Electricity Authority requirements.
C. Front panel shall include open and closed indicating lamps, on and off
circuit breaker control switch, mimic diagram, pad lockable earthing
switch handle with indications of position and direction of rotation, and
potential indicators, as a general requirement for all units.
D. All protective relays, monitoring and control devices of a feeder shall be
accommodated in a metal-enclosed LV compartment on top of the MV
enclosure. LV and auxiliary wiring shall front Access. Multi-pin,
disconnectable, lock-in type plug and socket arrangement shall be provided
between withdrawable and fixed parts of switchgear.
E. All switchgear shall be provided with Local/Remote selector switch for
controlling the switchgear either from local or remotely via SCADA
system at local position switchgear all outgoings will operate manually
while incomers manual operation will be also subject to select manual
position from Automatic/Manual selector at bus-tie section.
F. The MVSG shall have the following specification:
 Rated voltage: 24 KV
 Frequency: 50 Hz
 Nominal operating voltage: 22 KV
 Power frequency withstand voltage at 50 Hz ~ 1 Min.: 50 KV
 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 µs: 125 KV
 Short time withstand current KA, RMS: 25 kA for 3 second (for LSC2B-
PM switchgear), and 20 kA for 1 second (for LSC2A-PI or PM
switchgear), and 20 kA for 3 seconds for Ring main units.
 Copper Purity not less than: 99.9 %
 Auxiliary voltage: 110 V.D.C 20%
 Passive internal arc classification: IAC AFLR (for LSC2B-PM
switchgear), and AFL (for LSC2A-PI or PM switchgear)
 The switchgear degree of protection shall be (IP-41).
G. Internal arc value, 1 sec: 25 kA (for LSC2B-PM switchgear), and 20 kA
(for LSC2A-PI or PM switchgear
Medium voltage switchgear and ring main unit
H. The entire switchgear and circuit breakers shall be rated to operate
continuously under full capacity in 45oC ambient temp. Conditions and
relative humidity 90% non-condensing.
I. In the "Connected" and the "Disconnected/Test" position of the truck, the
switchgear shall be totally protected against contact with live parts with
objects larger than 1 mm in diameter.
J. Capacitive Voltage Divider for every incomer cubical equipped with three
capacitors dividers connected to the voltage presence monitored by LEDs
to indicate voltage presence on cable.
K. The secondary windings of VTs shall be protected by MCBs located at the
LV compartment. Each MCB shall be equipped with necessary auxiliary
contacts for alarm, interlock, SCADA interface, etc. applications.
L. The secondary circuits of the current transformers shall be connected to
terminal blocks located inside the LV compartment. These terminal blocks
shall be equipped with suitable built-in make before break shorting criteria.
M. DC supplies to each cubicle shall be protected by suitable MCBs equipped
with necessary auxiliary contacts to give alarms in case of MCB trips.
N. Test terminal blocks shall be provided inside insulating covered bases for
instruments, instrument transformers, relays etc. in LV compartments.
O. Components shall be interchangeable when of same rating and function.
P. The winding of the instrument transformers shall be made of copper and
the current transformers for each cubicle shall be dry type and shall be short
circuit proof. The short circuit current capacity shall be at minimum of 25
K.A for 3 sec. at rated voltage. They will have separate secondaries for
metering. And protection each with suitable burden, the current
transformers should be interchangeable from lower core to higher core
from the secondary side of the current transformer not from the primary
side and they shall be single phase.
Q. Precaution shall be taken at contacts between aluminum and copper
through bi-metal connections to avoid electrolytic action.
R. Structure shall be designed to enable the addition of future panels from
both sides.
S. Each cubicle must be equipped with space heaters to prevent moisture and
humidity ingress (220 V x 2 x 100 W) one in cable compartment and the
other in circuit breaker compartment controlled by miniature breaker and
by hygrostat.
T. All equipment (push buttons - indicating lamps - sockets and plugs
terminal blocks for C.T. and P.T. and control …etc.) must be made of
hygroscopic and non-flammable material.
U. The instruments shall be of flush type and mounted on hinged door at the
front of each cubicle.

V. The switchgear must be designed to be safe against spread of fire,
formation of internal excessive pressure (each compartment shall have its
own pressure relief vent), contact of live parts, ingress of dust and
splashing liquid.
W. Each primary winding of potential transformers shall be protected by
H.R.C fuse.
X. Every incoming and outgoing feeder, cubicle shall be equipped with an
earthing switch.
Y. When Vacuum circuit breakers are used, each incoming circuit breaker
must be equipped with 3 No. distribution class surge arrestor.
Z. The leakage path for fixing insulators and of P.Ts, C.Ts and surge arrestors
should be 2 cm/K.V or as per dimensions indicated in test certificate
approved by electricity holding company.
AA. The permissible (guaranteed) number of switching (On/Off) cycles at rated
current of C.Bs shall be >10000 cycle.
BB. Switchgear shall be provided with all necessary interface devices for
connection with SCADA system.
CC. Smart Digital power meters V, A, PF, kW, KVAR, kWh, kVARh, max
demand with Modbus communication and the readings to be transmitted to
the RTU installed at medium voltage switchgear shall be installed at
incoming feeders for primary switch gear and at outgoing for ring main
units.
DD. Power Cable Terminations: Fixed bolted type, unless otherwise specified,
complete with standard fittings and accessories for connection of incoming
and outgoing cables. Cable compartment shall be designed to permit cables
to enter enclosure and connect at respective terminals from below feeders
having single core, XLPE insulated, Aluminum cables of 400 and 240 sq.
mm. cross sectional area Where single core cables are used, top / bottom
cable entry plates shall be made of Aluminum with adequate thickness and
rigidity to support cables.
EE. Facilities shall be provided for earthing the feeder side of the circuit
breaker without the use of loose attachments.
FF. Finish shall be battle-ship gray, "or any other color approved by Engineer",
vermin-proof and suitable for the climatic conditions of the site.
GG. Each switchgear unit shall be provided with a metal rating and name plate
giving the required particulars in accordance with the IEC
recommendations.
HH. Instruments and smart meters shall be of the flush pattern with phenolic-
black finish digital type.
II. Relays shall be of the flush fixed pattern digital type.
JJ. Test terminal blocks shall be provided for all instruments, relays ...etc.

2. PRIMARY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
A. The medium voltage switchgear shall be LSC2B-PM as specified under
IEC62271, dead front, self-supporting structure, consists of line-ups of
metal enclosed, air-insulated and compartmented cubicles. SF6 or Vacuum
type circuit breakers on draw-out trucks as indicated. The truck is fully
interlocked with the interrupter and the stationary cubicle. It is manually
moved horizontally from the "Operating" to the "Isolated/Test" position
without the use of auxiliary equipment. A fully isolated low-voltage
compartment is integrated.
B. Provide no. (2) Cassette Trolley with each switchgear for ingress and
egress of circuit breakers.
C. The stationary part of the cubicles is built as a self-supporting structure,
bolted together from rolled steel sheets of at least 2.5 mm gauge, rated for
24 kV. Each cubicle is to be divided into three sealed and isolated
compartments by metallic partitions, i.e., the bus bar, cable connection and
circuit-breaker compartment. The vertical partitions shall carry automatic,
phase-segregated safety-shutters made of metallic material. These shutters
are to be sealed in both directions, effectively preventing ionized gases
from fault-arcs to spread to the neighboring compartment. Each
compartment shall have its own pressure-relief device.
D. The interrupter truck shall carry SF6 or vacuum circuit-breaker, with
associated operating mechanism and auxiliary devices. By manually
moving the truck it may be brought into a distinct operating and isolating
test position. Truck shall be provided with a 4-wheel type truck, with
handle for racking and locking breaker into in-service or disconnected
positions. Truck shall be of self-aligning design running on fixed steel rails,
continuously earthed. The front-shield of the truck shall engage firmly with
the frame of the cubicle when locked in the operating position and become
an arc and pressure-proof part of the enclosure.
E. All main busbars and droppers shall be isolated by heat shrinkable tubes
and the connection points with suitable isolated covers.
F. Additional Safety Feature: A series of sturdy mechanical interlocks shall
force the operator into the only safe operating sequence of the switchgear,
preventing positively the following:
 Moving the truck with the circuit-breaker closed.
 Switching the circuit-breaker in any but the locked "Operating" or
"Disconnected/ Test" position.
 Moving the truck into the operating position with the low voltage plug
disengaged.
 Engaging the grounding switch with the truck in the "Operating" position
and moving the truck into this position with the grounding switch
engaged.
G. In the "Connected" and the "Disconnected/Test" position of the truck, the
switchgear shall be totally protected against contact with live parts with
objects larger than 1 mm in diameter.
2.1 Incoming Feeder Panels
Shall be equipped with the following components:
A. One withdrawal, motor operated, SF6 or vacuum type circuit breaker
rated 1250A, with 25 KA for 3 sec. short circuit breaking capacity.
B. One set of busbars rated 1250 A and designed to withstand
electrodynamics forces under worst short circuit conditions of 25 KA.
C. Three current transformers with separate secondaries 10 VA class 0.5
for metering (0.5M5) and 15 VA for protection class (5P10).
D. Current transformers accuracy check calculation to be provided.
E. Three Withdrawable potential transformers each primary winding
protected by H.R.C fuse for metering and protection.
(Ratio: 22000/√3 / 110/√3 / 110/3)
F. Indicator lamps (LED Type) (on-off-trip) (red-green-yellow).
G. LED lamps for voltage presence (L1, L2, L3).
H. Smart Digital power meters V, A, PF, kW, KVAR, kWh, kVARh, max
demand with Modbus communication and the readings to be
transmitted to SWG-RTU.
I. Two push buttons CLOSE and OPEN.
J. One position indicator for circuit breaker.
K. One position indicator for earthing switch
L. One flag relay with a reset push button and alarm for each of the
following (aux power loss A.C loss any M.C.B trip protective relay
trip).
M. One master horn for switchgear to give alarm during the following
cases:
 aux loss in any panel.
 Protection relays trip.
 Incoming feeder 24 K.V loss for any incoming panel.
 Any M.C.B trip.
N. One microprocessor type digital protection and control relay equipped
with ethernet TCP/IP IEC-61850 communication port with the
following functions:
a. Three phase non-directional over current and short circuit (ANSI
50 /51) (Three stages) relay with definite time delay characteristic.
b. Non-directional earth fault relay (ANSI 50N/51N) definite time
characteristics.
c. Three phase directional over current relay (ANSI 67).
d. Directional relay for directional earth fault protection (ANSI 67N).
e. Three phase under/over voltage relays adjustable between (ANSI
27/59).
f. Relay characteristic must be coordinated with and approved by the
Electric Power Authority.
g. The protection relay shall also function as a communicating remote
terminal unit for its associated MV cubicle through PRP or HSR
connection. the relay shall be equipped with a digital I/O module
for providing control and obtaining status as per the following:
 close/open/trip of circuit breaker status of circuit breaker position
(open/closed)
 status of circuit breaker truck (connected/disconnected)
 status of earthing switch (connected/disconnected)
 status of general alarm (aux power loss or trip signal)
 The protection relays shall also transmit all its measurement
readings (A, V, PF, kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh, maximum demand,
waveform capture) to RTU through communication protocol IEC
61850.
O. Circuit breaker mechanism shall have an anti-pumping relay.
P. Earthing switch.
Q. Set of surge arresters
2.2 Outgoing Feeder Panel
A. One withdrawable, motor operated, SF6 or vacuum type circuit breaker
rated 1250 A, with 25 KA for 3 sec. short circuit breaking capacity.
B. One set of insulated busbars rated 1250 Amps and designed to
withstand electrodynamics forces under worst short circuit conditions
of 25 KA.
C. Three current transformers with separate secondaries 10 VA class 0.5
for metering (0.5M5) and 15 VA for protection class (5P10).
D. Current transformers accuracy check calculation to be provided.
E. One microprocessor type digital protection and control relay equipped
with ethernet TCP/IP IEC-61850 communication port with the
50/51) (Three stages) relay with definite time delay characteristic.
b. Non-directional earth fault relay (ANSI 50N/51N) definite time
characteristic.
c. Relay characteristic must be coordinated with and approved by the

d. The protection relay shall also function as a communicating remote
terminal unit for its associated cubicle. the relay shall be equipped
with a digital I/O module for providing control and obtaining status
as per the following:
 close/open/trip of circuit breaker
 status of circuit breaker position (open/closed).
 status of circuit breaker truck (connected/disconnected).
 status of earthing switch (connected/disconnected).
 status of general alarm (aux power loss or trip signal).
61850.
F. Indicator lamps (LED Type) (on-off-trip) (red-green-yellow).
G. Lamps for voltage phases (L1, L2, L3) (LED Type).
H. Smart Digital power meters V, A, PF, kW, KVAR, kWh, kVARh, max
demand with Modbus communication and the readings to be
transmitted to SWG-RTU.
I. Circuit breaker mechanism shall have an anti- pumping relay.
J. Earthing switch.
K. Auxiliary relays.
L. Two push buttons on and off.
M. One position indicator for circuit breaker.
N. One position indicator for earthing switch
O. One master flag relay with a reset push button and alarm for each of the
following (aux supply loss A.C loss any M.C.B trip protective relay
trip).
2.3 Bus Sectionalized Cubicle
A. One with drawable, motor operated, SF6 or vacuum type circuit breaker
rated 1250 A, with 20 KA for 3 sec. short circuit breaking capacity.
B. One set of insulated busbars rated 1250 A and designed to withstand
electrodynamics forces under worst short circuit conditions of 25 KA.
C. Three ammeters (smart digital type) and transmit the signals to SWG-
RTU.
D. Three current transformers with separate secondaries 10 VA class 0.5
for metering (0.5M5) and 15 VA for protection class (5P10). Current
transformers Accuracy check calculation to be provided.
E. One microprocessor type digital protection and control relay equipped
with Ethernet TCP/IP IEC-61850 communication port with the
50/51) (Three stages) relay with definite time delay characteristic.
b. Non directional earth fault relay (ANSI 50N/51N) definite time
characteristic.
c. Relay characteristic must be coordinated with and approved by the
d. The protection relay shall also function as a communicating remote
terminal unit for its associated cubicle. the relay shall be equipped
with a digital I/O module for providing control and obtaining status
as per the following:
 close/open/trip of circuit breaker
 status of circuit breaker position (open/closed).
 status of circuit breaker truck (connected/disconnected).
 status of earthing switch (connected/disconnected).
 status of general alarm (aux power loss or trip signal).
61850.
F. Automatic electrical interlock between the incoming and bus coupler
circuit breakers shall be provided as follows:
a. Bus tie circuit breaker is normally switched off while the incoming
feeders circuit breakers are switched on.
b. If the incoming feeder/feeders circuit breaker in any section is switched
off, then the bus tie circuit breaker can be switched on.
c. Mechanical interlocks to prevent the following faulty operations:
 Insertion or withdrawal of a closed CB
 Closing of breaker not locked in service or test position.
 Closing of earthing switch with breaker in service position.
 Breaker insertion with earthing switch closed.
 Breaker insertion with LV plug not connected.
G. Circuit breaker mechanism shall have an anti-pumping relay.
H. Indicator lamps (LED Type) (on-off-trip) (red-green-yellow).
I. Auxiliary relays.
J. Two push buttons on and off.
K. One position indicator for circuit breaker.
L. One position indicator for earthing switch
M. One master flag relay with a reset push button and alarm for each of the
following (aux. power loss A.C loss any M.C.B trip protective relay
trip).
N. Low voltage socket and plug.
2.4 MV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. All circuit-breakers on the 24 kV switchgear shall be interchangeable.
B. Each incoming, outgoing feeder and bus-tie cubicle shall comprise
circuit breaker. The circuit breakers shall be SF6 or vacuum type with
closed gas circuit, and with pressure detector to prevent operation of
circuit breaker in case of loss of gas pressure within the sealed
enclosure, mounted on withdrawable trucks, and shall fulfill the
following technical specifications:
a. Type: SF6/vacuum
b. Rated voltage 24 KV
c. Nominal operating voltage 22 KV
d. Rated current: 1250 Amps
e. Incoming feeders: 1250 Amps
f. Bus-tie: 1250 Amps
g. Outgoing feeders:1250 Amps
h. Rated Breaking capacity KA:
25 KA, RMS (LSC2B switchgear).
20 KA, RMS (LSC2A switchgear).
i. Rated Making current capacity:
63 KA, Peak (LSC2B switchgear).
50 KA, Peak (LSC2A switchgear).
j. Rated operating sequence: O-0.3s-CO-3min.-CO
k. Power frequency withstand voltage at 50 HZ ~ 1Min.: 50 KV
l. Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50µS: 125 KV
m. Short time withstand current KA, RMS, 3Sec:
25 KA, RMS (LSC2B switchgear).
20 KA, RMS (LSC2A switchgear).
C. The circuit breaker is equipped with closing spring charged by an
electric motor operated by 110 V DC.
D. It shall have two electric coils one for tripping and the other for closing.
Circuit breaker opening and closing can be done electrically by push
button at low voltage compartment and mechanically at the circuit
breaker.
E. Operating spring can be manually charged too. It shall be equipped with
a counter to count the number of operations and an indication of this
spring status.
F. The tripping, closing and auxiliary functions shall be capable of
operating at control voltages between 85 per cent and 110 per cent of
the rated values.
G. Interchangeability: Circuit breakers of different current ratings shall not
be interchangeable. Circuit breakers of same current rating shall be
wired alike and interchangeable.
H. Circuit breakers used in ring main units shall be of class M1-E2 for
mechanical and electrical endurances respectively to IEC 62271-100.
I. Circuit breakers used in Secondary MVSG (LSC2A) switchgears shall
be of class M2-E2 for mechanical and electrical endurances
respectively to IEC 62271-100.
J. Circuit breakers used in Primary MVSG (LSC2B) switchgears shall be
of class M2-E2-C2 for mechanical and electrical endurances and for
restrike probability during capacitive current breaking respectively to
IEC 62271-100.
K. SF6 breakers shall be provided with pressure switches, one per pole, to
initiate alarm in case the pressure of the SF6 gas drops below
manufacturer set values. Gas filling valves shall be provided unless
sealed type circuit breakers are used. Gas status indicator shall be
provided on circuit breaker front.
2.5 MV DISCONNECTORS (FOR INSTALLATION IN PRIMARY
SWITCHGEAR)
A. Switch-Disconnector: General purpose, 3-pole, load- break, short-circuit
make, SF6 interrupter or vacuum interrupter type, equipped with gas
pressure indicator with alarm contacts, class M1-E2 for mechanical and
electrical endurances respectively to IEC 62271-103, providing positive
break indication, as defined in IEC 62271-102, with contact position
indicating device and reliable method of preventing any earth leakage
currents passing from terminals of one side to terminals of other side of
the switch-disconnector when in the open position.
B. Switch-disconnector operation shall be electrically and manually
through handles at front of unit. Switching mechanism shall be manual,
motor operated, spring charged, quick-make and quick-break, with
speed of switching independent of operator. On/off control push buttons
shall be provided for controlling the switch. Switch-disconnector shall
have on and off positions, lockable in either position. Reliable
mechanical indicator shall be provided for indicating the two positions.
C. Switch-disconnector earthing switch of the quick-make type, front
operated (operation being independent of operator), class E2 for
electrical endurance to IEC 62271-102, shall close onto cable terminals
and be interlocked such that it will close only after load-break switch
disconnector and associated breaker are open. Earth blades shall be
visible through an inspection window. Access to cable compartment
shall be prevented unless earthing switch is closed.
D. Switch-Disconnector Ratings:
 Rated Normal Current: 630 A.
 Rated Short-Circuit Making Current (peak): 50 kA.
 Rated Short Time Current: 20 kA for 1 sec.
E. Mechanical endurance shall be class M1 according to IEC 62271-103.
3. SECONDRY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

A. The medium voltage switchgear shall be indoor categorized (LSC2A-PI or
PM) as specified under IEC62271, single busbar, dead front, self-
supporting structure, consists of line-ups of metal enclosed, air-insulated
and compartmented cubicles. with motorized circuit breaker, isolating
disconnectors, and/or switch –disconnector-fuse combination, motorized
switch disconnector. The switchgear cubicles and interrupters shall be
factory assembled and type tested.
B. Circuit Breakers: Frame mounted and bolted into position. Frame shall
have wheels for handling during installation or maintenance.
C. Front panel shall include open and closed indicating lamps, on and off
circuit breaker control switch, mimic diagram, pad lockable earthing
switch handle with indications of position and direction of rotation, and
potential indicators, as a general requirement for all units. Multi-pin,
disconnectable, lock-in type plug and socket arrangement shall be provided
between circuit breaker and stationary part of cubicle.
D. Single isolator shall be provided, on busbar side of circuit breaker,
interlocked with circuit breaker operation such that isolation or connection
of the isolator is not possible while circuit breaker is closed. Isolators shall
be pad lockable in the off and earth positions.
E. All protective relays, monitoring and control devices of a feeder shall be
accommodated in a metal-enclosed LV compartment on top of the MV
enclosure. LV and auxiliary wiring shall front Access.
F. The entire switchgear and circuit breakers shall be rated to operate
continuously under full capacity in 45oC ambient temp. Conditions and
relative humidity 90% non-condensing.
G. The switchgear degree of protection shall be (IP-31).
H. The secondary circuits of the current with necessary auxiliary contacts to
give alarms in case of MCB trips.
4. SMART GRID SWITCHGEAR REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT

(SWGRTU):
4.1 GENERAL:
A. SWG-RTU shall be built on a modular flexible architecture.
B. The SWG-RTU shall be organized with a main communication unit
that supports communication with the remote-control Centre (CCC),
communication with devices located in the switchgears.
C. A power supply which integrates a 24Vdc battery and battery charger
feeds from 220 V A.C for the communication transmission systems,
The battery autonomy time and capacity shall be at least two hours.
The battery shall be capable to operate properly at ambient temperature
of 50 °C.
D. The SWG-RTU shall be expandable by adding modules, the number
of modules shall not be limited and not based on a rack design.
E. The SWG-RTU shall be configurable locally or/and remotely.
F. A configuration tool, based on PC, shall be provided for configuration
of the SWG-RTU. This tool shall be connected locally or remotely to
download and upload the configuration.
G. A web server shall be integrated into the SWG-RTU communication
unit and shall provide facilities for maintenance, settings including
cyber security settings, and historical logs display. This Web server
shall be accessible locally and remotely, by mean of a standard laptop
PC. Locally the maintenance tool shall be connected to the SWG-RTU
by a Wi-Fi or Ethernet communication port.
H. The firmware shall be updated either locally or from the central system.
4.2 SWG-RTU Control and Monitoring Functions
A. The SWG-RTU shall connect via Ethernet IEC 61850 to each medium
voltage switchgear digital protection and control relay, SWG-RTU
shall also be capable to run sequence of operation of circuit breakers
as necessary without remote signal. Each digital protection and control
relay shall act as a standalone measuring and control RTU for its
associated MV cubicle.
B. The interface with Each MV cubicle shall provide at least:
 Circuit breaker status (closed/open) must be dual input.
 Earth switch position (closed/open) must be dual input.
 Circuit breaker control (close/open) must be dual output.
 Circuit breaker truck position (connected/disconnected).
 All protection and measurement functions offered by the protection
relay.
 All waveform capture performed by the protection relay.
4.3 SWG-RTU Archives function
A. Events and measurement shall be archived in logs.
B. Events shall be stored in the archive logs with a time resolution of 1ms,
and a discrimination of 10ms.
C. The capacity of the logs shall be up to 500,000 events and
measurement.

D. All the logs shall be available from a maintenance tool connected to
the SWG-RTU or sent on request to the Remote-Control Centre.
4.4 SWG-RTU Communication
A. Communication with Remote ADMS The SWG-RTU shall be able to
communicate with the ADMS on 2 channels. In case of redundancy the
ADMS will activate the backup communication channel. The
SWGRTU shall be able to also initiate a communication on the backup
channel in case of detection of inactivity on the main channel.
B. Protocol: The SWG-RTU shall comply with IEC 61850 Ed1/Ed2IEC
60870-5-104, or IEC 60870-5-104, DNP3.0 standard protocol.
C. The communication system is based on optical fiber. The SWG-RTU
power supply shall be sized to supply the communication modem.
D. Communication LAN for Digital protection relays of the MV
switchgear the SWG-RTU shall be able to provide communication
ports:
 Ethernet port
 RS232/RS485 port
E. Cyber Security
a. In order to secure all controls and data acquisition, the SWG-RTU
shall be designed to be compliant with NERC and IEC62351
requirements. The SWG-RTU shall support secure access based on
RBAC, with the possibility to configure the roles.
b. Local and remote access connection shall be secured for
maintenance (locally and remotely) with HTTPS, SFTP, IPSEC and
SSH protocols.
c. Authentication shall be based on a Radius server.
 SWG-RTU shall support remote firmware updates.
 Compatible with a full centralized RBAC management in
compliance with IEC 62351-9.
 Device hardening.
 Disabled or unused functionality shall not compromise security.
 Unnecessary services and programs shall be removed. If removal is
not possible, the unnecessary services and programs shall be
disabled.
d. Interface minimization
 Each interface shall support only the data types and protocols
needed to meet the functional requirements.
 Unused interfaces and ports shall be removed. If removal is not
possible, the unused interfaces and ports shall be disabled.
 A complete list of supported data types and supported
communication protocols per interface shall be provided.
 All hardware interfaces that are used for programming or
debugging shall be completely removed after production.
e. Account hardening
 The SWG-RTU shall not contain active default, guest and
anonymous accounts.
 All remote access to root accounts on the SWG-RTU shall be
disabled.
 All Vendor-owned accounts where feasible shall be removed.
 The list of all accounts on the SWG-RTU shall be provided.
f. Communication
 The SWG-RTU shall comply to security standards
 The RTU shall follow the IEC 62351 standards and at least:
IEC 62351-5: 2013
IEC 62351-8
g. Communication security
 The RTU shall support network and transport layer encryption
using IPSec.
h. Management of Security passwords
 The SWG-RTU service application shall support individual user
passwords.
 Passwords shall be stored together with a salt using an allowed
cryptographic hash function.
 The RTU service application shall enforce a high complexity of
passwords.
 The RTU shall lock the access after several password error.
i. User Authentication
 The RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the WAN
interface using a challenge-response protocol based on message
authentication codes The RTU shall terminate the connection if the
user authentication fails.
 The RTU shall authenticate the communication parties on the Local
Maintenance interface.
 It shall be possible to configure the SWG-RTU so that it blocks
authentication requests, either temporarily or permanently, from an
account after a number of failed login attempts. The number of
failed login attempts and the time the account is blocked shall be
configurable.
j. Security testing
 The SWG-RTU shall comply with ACHILLE Level1.

4.5 SWG RTU signal list:
Type Alarm Description signal type Remarks
COM through
C.B ON / OFF Status dual input
PR
Earth Switch position COM through
dual input
( closed / open) PR
C.B Truck position COM through
dual input
( Rack in / Rack out) PR
command COM through dual
( close / open) PR output
COM through
Local / Remote status
PR
Measurement Analogue input
(I, V, F, KW, KVAR, P.F, COM through
Energy KWH) PR
dual input
SF6 Gas Permissible COM through
(for SF6
pressure (stage 1 / stage 2) PR
Breakers)
Protection Relay OC trip COM through
dual input
(stage 1 / stage 2) PR
Protection Relay EF trip COM through
dual input
OUTGOINGS (stage 1 / stage 2) PR
counting number of COM through
operations PR
COM through
Tripping status
PR
Protection relay watchdog COM through
alarm PR
COM through
PR
Lock out relay alarm
(DI + DO for
reset)
Analogue input
Smart KWHM monitoring through
communication
Smart KWHM Alarms
Meter cover open
Meter Terminal Cover
COM
Open
Module Cover Open
Energy Reverses
Earth or Current Bypass
Connection
Meter Current Overload
Meter Over Voltage and
Under Voltage
Low Battery alarm
Phase Sequence
Missing Potential
Low Credit
DC Supply Fail DI
Any MCB trip DI
Voltage presence for all
COM
phases
COM through dual input
C.B ON / OFF Status
PR + DI each
Earth Switch position COM through
dual input
(closed / open) PR
C.B Truck position COM through
dual input
( Rack in / Rack out) PR
command COM through dual
( close / open) PR output
COM through
Local / Remote status
PR
Measurement Analogue input
(I, V, F, KW, KVAR, P.F, COM through
Energy KWH) PR
SF6 Gas Permissible dual input
INCOMERS COM through
pressure (for SF6
PR
(stage 1 / stage 2) Breakers)
Protection Relay Directional COM through
OC trip PR
dual input
( stage 1 / stage 2) PR
Protection Relay Directional COM through
EF trip PR
dual input
(stage 1 / stage 2) PR
Protection relay over / under COM through
dual input
voltage trip PR
operations PR

COM through
Tripping status
PR
alarm PR
COM through
PR
(DI + DO for
reset)
Analogue input
smart KWHM monitoring through
communication
smart KWHM Alarms
Meter cover open
Meter Terminal Cover
Open
Module Cover Open
Energy Reverses
Earth or Current Bypass
Connection COM
Under Voltage
Low Battery alarm
Phase Sequence
Missing Potential
Low Credit
DC Supply Fail DI
Any mcb trip DI
COM
phases
COM through dual input
C.B ON / OFF Status
PR + DI each
C.B Truck position
COM dual input
(Rack in / Rack out)
command dual
COM
( close / open) output
COUPLER
Analogue input
Measurement (I) through
communication
dual input
SF6 Gas Permissible COM through
(for SF6
pressure (stage 1 / stage 2) PR
Breakers)
dual input
dual input
operations PR
COM through
Tripping status
PR
alarm PR
COM through
PR
(DI + DO for
reset)
DC Supply Fail DI
Any MCB trip DI
0/ Manual / Auto status DI
Battery disconnected COM
absence of input power COM
Power supply Voltage output fault COM
and Battery fault - End of life COM
communication communication Equipment
of RTU Failure
COM
(for Each Device
communicated)
Charger and AC failure DI
batteries of Dc Low voltage DI
SWG Charger off / failure DI
Transformer windings COM analogue For
temperature input Radial
Transformer Fans on / off status COM connected
Temperature Alarm COM Aux.
Temperature trip COM Trans

4.6 EQUIPMENT DATA
A. Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include
but not be limited to the following:
B. Key interlocking scheme showing key numbers and operations
performed. The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any
material covered by this section shall include but not be limited to the
following:
C. Complete technical data on the 24kV primary medium voltage
switchgear equipment.
D. including data on operating characteristics, compliance with standards,
dimensions and weights, detailed description, operating mechanism
etc.
E. Complete technical data on instruments protective and auxiliary relays,
measuring instruments including manufacturer's catalogues, operating
characteristics, operating curves, for fuses detailed description.
4.7 BATTERY
A. Battery characteristics:
 Type Nickal-cadium type
 Number of cells 95
 Rated voltage 110V
 Rated voltage per cell 1.2V
 Rated capacity based on approved calculations.
 Electrolyte potassium hydroxide solution
B. General specification for battery set:
 The battery shall be able to withstand full charging and discharging
currents at an electrolyte temp. Up to 50 C.
 Battery calculation shall be submitted with capacity sufficient to
supply all MV switchgear auxiliary loads, relays, coils, lamps,
alarms, meters etc. for 8 hours, to close all circuit breakers in rapid
succession, and trip all circuit breakers simultaneously with the
charger off, moreover calculation shall consider 1.15 design margin
and 1.25 aging factor.
 Battery completely charged shall act as stand by dc supply in a
floating condition, parallel to a battery charger and the distributor
supplying DC current.
 Cell containers made of polypropylene should be submitted as main
offer and of stainless steel as an alternative offer.
 All the accessories, such as bolts, washers, and links necessary for
connecting cells series should be delivered.
 The battery shall be delivered complete with the mounting racks.
 Each battery string shall be provided with a voltmeter to measure the
cell voltage, a hydrometer to measure the specific gravity of the
electrolyte, the necessary copper connections, and the necessary
quantity of the hydroxides (potassium hydroxide lithium hydroxide).
4.8 AUTOMATIC FLOAT BATTERY CHARGER
A. The battery charger shall have nominal output voltage 110 V DC. It
will be three phase bridge connected. solid state type. It will have float
charging and high-rate charging regimes operating on the principle of
constant voltage output. The charger must have the possibility of both
manual and automatic switching over from one regime to the other one
depending on the state of battery bank. The charger shall soft start
features.
B. The output voltage, at any regime, must be adjustable and stable within
the specified range when output current is varied from 0 % to 100 %
of its rated value, AC supply voltage and/or frequency fluctuate within
the specified ranges.
C. The charger output current be automatically limited to the specified
value.
D. A control unit must be added so that the load supply voltage is
regulated 110 5% V DC independent on the charger output without
any instantaneous interruption of load supply.
E. The charger must be equipped with a DC voltage regulating unit for
feeding the control, signal and protection circuits of medium voltage
switchboard within the specified voltage range at either battery float or
high-rate charging regime.
F. The charger is to be equipped on all sides (input and outputs) with
miniature circuit-breakers having thermal and magnetic releases on all
poles and with the following specification:
 AC supply side (AC, 3 phase) 16 A
 Breaking current 10 KA
 Battery side (DC) 30 A
 Load side (DC) 32 A
G. The charger shall have the specification:
a. AC supply voltage 3-phase 50c/s, 380 + 10%-15%
b. Output DC voltage:
 Float charging 90 to 135 (to be set at 128.8 V).
 High-rate charging 90 to 160 (to be set at 147.2 V).
 Load voltage 110 5%
 Charger output current 10 A - 30 A adjustable range
c. Output DC voltage:
static stability 1 % at variation of:
 Output DC current from 0% to 100 % of its nominal value (30A)
 Input AC voltage from 85% to 110% of its nominal value (380 V)
 Nominal frequency by 6%
 Long term stability: 0.15% of nominal DC output voltage per 1000
hrs.
d. Ripple voltage:
 Battery connected: ≤ 1% rms of nominal output DC voltage.
 Battery not connected: 5% rms of nominal output DC voltage.
e. Insulation level: ≥ 2 KV AC for one minute between input/output
and earth.
f. Insulation resistance: 10 M. Ohm with 500 V DC between
input/output and earth.
g. Noise level: Not more than 65 db.
H. The output DC voltage of the charger shall not be affected by
reversing of the phase sequence.
I. The charger is to be connected permanently in parallel with battery
bank and feeding at the same time the DC load.
J. The charger shall be equipped with the following protection,
control, indication, alarm, and metering devices.
K. Battery charger protection:
a. AC side
 Phase(s) failure
 over voltage and under voltage
 Input CB (provided with overload and short circuit protection)
 Varistors (AC surge suppression)
b. DC side
 Over voltage charger output.
 Over current (battery charging current)
 Reverse polarity
 output circuit-breakers one for load, other for each battery charging
string
 (Provided with over current and short circuit protection)
 Under voltage on battery side
c. Charger side
 Surge (spikes) suppressors
 Electronic current limit (charger output)
 Semi-conductor fuses for thyristors
 Blocking diodes, to prevent battery discharge in case of bridge
failure.
d. Trip actions
 Battery charging over current
 AC malfunction (phase failure, under voltage and over voltage)
e. Alarm actions
 Low voltage (under voltage on battery)
 Charger failure
 Circuit breaker trip
f. Control:
 On/off switch
 Mode selector for float and high-rate: Manual\ Automatic
 Setting for all parameters:
 Max. charging current
 Float charging voltage
 High-rate charging voltage
 Alarm acknowledgment and reset and test
g. Metering and indication
 Both DC volts (one for battery, one for load)
 Supply side AC volt
 both DC currents (one for battery, one for load)
 Charging failure (red light) and free contact for remote alarm
 AC circuit breaker trip (light)
 Light for each operating mode (float/high-rate)
 DC earth fault.
4.9 DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
A. It shall be of metal enclosed type and comprise all the necessary control
switches and measuring instruments. It shall be furnished with
necessary protective and signaling devices.
5. SMART GRID RING MAIN UNITS (Type-A and Type-B)

A. Regarding Smart Grid distribution network, there shall be two types of
RMUs:
a. Type-A RMU: Monitoring Only
b. Type-B RMU: Monitoring and Control
5.1 General Specifications
The following specifications is common to both types of RMUs
A. Ring main unit GIS Type with service continuity LSC2-PM according
to IEC62271 feeding each transformer comprises two (2) or three (3)
numbers of three-pole load break switches rated 630 Amps, 24 KV for
the incoming / link / outgoing feeders cables and one (1) three-pole
fusible load breaker switch and tripping if one fuse blows to protect the

transformer, at 24KV for the outgoing cable connected to the
transformer.
B. Ring main unit feeding the auxiliary transformer of MV switchgear is
type-B.
C. The RMU and busbar shall all be contained in a stainless-steel
enclosure filled with SF6 at maximum 0.3 bar relative pressure to
ensure the insulation and breaking functions. This compartment is a
sealed pressure system, in accordance with the IEC 62271-1 standard,
with a service lifetime of 30 years. In addition. No refilling of the gas
shall be required during the whole service lifetime
D. It shall provide full insulation, making the switchgear insensitive to the
environment (temporary flooding, high humidity...). Assembled, the
active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance-free
E. The switchboards shall be designed so as to prevent access to all live
parts during operation without the use of tools.
F. MV Cable connection bushings shall be accessible from the front of
the RMU. The bushings should be conveniently located for working
with cables specified and allow the termination of these cables in
accordance with the instructions supplied The profiles of the cable
connection bushings shall be in compliance with EN 50181 standard.
G. Transformer protection feeder shall be used by a LBS switch-fuse
combination for rating less than 1500 kVA or circuit breaker for rating
equal or greater than 1500 kVA.
H. The switches in switch-fuse combination shall be of the maintenance-
free, low pressure SF6 gas type. The position of the contacts shall be
clearly visible on the front of the switchboard. The position indicator
shall provide positive contact and fuse blown indications in accordance
with IEC 62271-102 standard
I. The switches shall have 3 positions, open-disconnected, closed and
earthed, and will be constructed in such a way that natural interlocking
prevents unauthorized operations
J. An operating mechanism can be used to manually close the switch and
charge the mechanism in a single movement
K. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an
integrated push button
L. Fuses shall be installed in 3 individual sealed chambers metalized on
the outside and detachable. They shall be mounted in series with the
switch with the following operating mode: blowing of a fuse releases
a striker pin which causes three-phase opening of the switch and
prevents reclosing. The fuse chamber shall be able to be changed when
needed

M. Cable termination boxes shall be provided for the incoming and
outgoing.
N. They shall be GIS ring main unit of 3 pole gang operated type capable
of interrupting safely, their nominal full load current.
O. The switch-fuse disconnector shall have the following rating:
 Nominal voltage 22 KV.
 Maximum operating voltage 24 kV.
 Rated current 630 A.
 Rated withstand voltage, 1 min 50 KV
 BIL between phase and earth 125 KV
 Rated short time current 3 S 20 KA
 Peak withstand current 50 KA
P. The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles
through levers. Protective barriers must be provided to safeguard the
personnel from unintential contact with the live parts during switching
operations.
Q. Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the ON/OFF positions of the
switches and the hand-operated handles shall be provided with locks,
where required.
R. Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when
working on cables.
S. Earthing switches are to be provided on the f side to enable
earthing the cable feeders when working on the cables.
T. Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their
relevant earth switches such that no load break switch can be switched
on as long as his mate earth switch is in the ON position and vice versa.
U. Ring main unit must be equipped with earth fault indicators of the type
and according to the Egyptian Electricity Authority requirements.
V. Outgoing feeder panel will be as indicated on the drawing.
W. The degree of protection shall be IP65, where external enclosure
degree of protection shall be IP31.
X. The sheet steel thickness shall be (2 mm).
Y. All load break switches installed in (Type-B) RMU`S shall be
motorized type.
5.2 Voltage Presence Indicators (VPI)
A. Each RMU function shall be equipped with a Voltage Presence
Indicator (VPI) on the front cover to indicate whether there is voltage
in the cables.
B. The voltage indicator shall be in compliance with IEC 62271-206
standard.

C. Cable connection bushings shall be equipped with capacitive dividers
that will supply low voltage power to the voltage presence lamps.
D. The lamps shall be of high-performance LED technology to insure high
visibility and long-life duration. Three voltage sensing inlets shall be
provided on each function to allow checking the phase concordance.
E. It shall be possible to replace the voltage presence indicator while unit
remains energized, guaranteeing the safety of people.
5.3 Communicating Fault Passage indicator with integral voltage
detector FPIVD
A. Each of the two Incoming Load break switches shall be equipped with
a fault passage indicator with integral voltage detection device
(FPIVD).
B. The voltage signal shall be taken from the Voltage Presence Indicator
(VPI) connected to capacitive divider in each load break switch cable
bushing.
C. The voltage detection device shall display the MV network voltage in
percentage of the network service voltage. It is not allowed to use a
voltage measuring tool to calibrate the device
D. The fault passage indicator function is used to detect and localize the
faulty part of the network.
E. It shall indicate short circuit and earth faults with a high-performance
red LED on the front panel.
F. It shall indicate permanently the load currents of each phase and
memorize the maximum of each phase.
G. It shall indicate both phase-to -phase and phase-to earth faults.
H. To guarantee a fault validation on cable with low load value, a
validation by voltage presence shall be provided.
I. It shall be equipped with both automatic and manual setting modes.
J. It shall be dual powered device such that the FPI function is self-
powered however the communication function shall be with external
power supply used for the communication RTU.
K. It shall provide an output for external lamp gathering short circuit and
earth fault remote indication as well as a relay or transistor output for
ADMS interface.
L. The current sensors shall be mounted onto the RMU bushing
M. it shall be communicating using Modbus protocol to the RTU
N. It shall indicate permanently that it is in operation, it could be by means
of the permanent load indication.

5.4 General Specifications for RMU Remote Terminal Unit (RMU-
RTU)
RTU-RMU (Type-A).
RTU-RMU (Type-B).
A. RMU-RTU shall be built on a modular flexible architecture.
B. The RTU shall be organized with a main communication unit that
supports communication with the remote-control center,
communication with devices located in the substations and
communication with interfaces with the switchgears.
C. A power supply which integrates a 24Vdc battery charger and provides
48Vdc for the motorization, 24Vdc for the electronic devices and
24Vdc for the communication transmission systems, the battery AH
shall be as per the manufactures standard and recommendation.
D. The RMU-RTU shall be expandable by adding modules, the number
of modules shall not be limited and not based on a rack design.
E. The RMU-RTU consumption shall be limited to 10W per substation.
F. The RMU-RTU shall be configurable locally or/and remotely.
G. A configuration tool, based on PC, shall be provided for configuration
of the RMU-RTU. This tool shall be connected locally or remotely to
download and upload the configuration.
H. A web server shall be integrated into the RMU-RTU communication
unit and shall provide facilities for maintenance, settings including
cyber security settings, and historical logs display. This Web server
shall be accessible locally and remotely, by mean of a standard laptop
PC. Locally the maintenance tool shall be connected to the RMU-RTU
by Ethernet communication port.
I. The firmware shall be updated either locally or from the central system.
5.4.1 RMU-RTU Control and Monitoring Functions
A. Particular requirements for RMU(Type-A) Monitoring only:
a. Each medium voltage switchgear in the substation shall be
monitored.
b. The interface with the RMU shall provide at least: -
 Switch position (Dual input)
 Earth switch position (single or dual input)
 Voltage presence (via communication)
 Fault passage indication alarm (via communication)
 Signals from transformer (winding temperature, status for
fans working/alarm/trip).
 Signals from all low voltage circuit breakers, smart meters.

 All monitoring data shall be transmitted to CCC and COC
buildings via the communication cables.
B. Particular requirements for RMU(Type-B) Monitoring and
control
a. Each medium voltage switchgear in the substation shall be
monitored and controlled by an interface and treatment unit.
b. It shall be possible to extend the number of monitored and
controlled switchgears by adding one interface modules per
switchgear. The interface with the RMU shall provide at least:
 two incoming Switch position (Dual input)
 Earth switch position (single input)
 Voltage presence (via communication)
 Fault passage indication alarm (via communication)
 Signals from transformer (winding temperature, status for
fans working/alarm/trip).
 Signals from all low voltage circuit breakers, smart meters.
 Incomings LBS motor control (each LBS must have its
dedicated control module).
 In addition to these direct interfaces with the RMU, the
number of operations shall be transmitted to the ADMS
 The interface shall control the switch motorization through a
dual output which provides the 48Vdc voltage to the interface
relay located into the switchgear.
 The control operation shall be secured by a select before
execute procedure, the 48Vdc power supply to the motor shall
be activated only during the execute phase.
 All monitoring data shall be transmitted to CCC and COC
buildings via the communication cables.
5.4.2 Archives
A. Events and measurement shall be archived in logs.
B. Events shall be stored in the archive logs with a time resolution
of 1ms, and a discrimination of 10ms.
C. The capacity of the logs shall be up to 500,000 events and
measurement
D. All the logs shall be available from a maintenance tool connected
to the RTU or sent on request to the Remote-Control Centre.
5.4.3 Communication
A. Communication with ADMS:
 The RTU shall be able to communicate with the ADMS on 2
channels. In case of redundancy the ADMS will activate the
backup communication channel. The RTU shall be able to also
initiate a communication on the backup channel in case of
detection of inactivity on the main channel.
B. Protocol
 The RTU shall comply with IEC 870-5-104 IEC 870-5-101
DNP3.0 standard protocol.
 The RTU shall support Secure Authentication according to IEC
62351-5.
C. Transmission
 The communication system is based on optical fiber. The RMU-
RTU power supply shall be sized to supply the communication
modem.
D. Transmitted data
a. The RMU-RTU shall transmit to the ADMS all the status and
measurement. Each data shall be individually configurable to
be sent or not to the ADMS.
b. The measurement shall be spontaneously sent to ADMS
according to configuration of:
 Threshold
 Dead band
E. Communication LAN for other devices
a. In order to ensure that future needs should be covered, the
RMU-RTU shall be able to provide additional communication
ports:
 Ethernet port
 RS232/RS485 port
F. Power supply
a. The RMU-RTU shall include a power supply which integrates
a 24Vdc battery charger
b. The battery charger shall be compensated in temperature and
protected against deep discharge and overvoltage. A single
24Vdc battery is mandatory in order to limit the maintenance
constraints.
c. In case of absence of the battery, the power supply shall be
able to supply at least the RMU-RTU.
d. The power supply, from the battery voltage, provides the
following:
 48Vdc± 10% for the motorization (only applicable for RMU-
Type B).
 This voltage shall be connected only in execute phase.
 24Vdc for the communicating devices.
 24Vdc for the RMU-RTU modules.
e. Power supply input:
 Input voltage: 230Vac ± 10%
 The power supply shall be insulated to 10kV, and surge
protected up to 20kV, in compliance with IEC60255-5.
f. Battery
 The battery capacity shall maintain a backup time of 2 hours
for all the voltage outputs and shall permit 10 Open/Close
cycles of the switchgear.
 The battery shall be able to withstand ambient temperature
50°C.
 The single 24Vdc battery shall be periodically checked, and a
battery fault shall be transmitted to the ADMS.
 The maximum battery charging time shall be 24hours.
 Monitoring
 The power supply shall deliver the following statuses to the
ADMS
 Battery disconnected
 Absence of power input
 Voltage output faults
 Battery fault
 Any other data should be available through a serial link
communication.
G. Cyber Security
a. In order to secure all controls and data acquisition, the RTU
shall be designed to be compliant with NERC and IEC62351
requirements. The RTU shall support secure access based on
RBAC, with the possibility to configure the roles.
b. Local and remote access connection shall be secured for
maintenance (locally and remotely) with HTTPS, SFTP,
IPSEC and SSH protocols.
c. Authentication shall be based on a Radius server.
d. Future proof design:
(1) Remote firmware update
 The RTU shall support remote firmware updates
Centralized RBAC management.
 The RTU shall be evaluative in order to be compatible with
a full centralized RBAC management in compliance with
IEC 62351-9
e. Hardening
(1) Device hardening

 Disabled or unused functionality shall not compromise
security.
 Unnecessary services and programs shall be removed. If
removal is not possible, the unnecessary services and
programs shall be disabled.
(2) Interface minimization
 Each interface shall support only the data types and
protocols needed to meet the functional requirements.
 Unused interfaces and ports shall be removed. If removal
is not possible, the unused interfaces and ports shall be
disabled.
 A complete list of supported data types and supported
communication protocols per interface shall be provided.
 All hardware interfaces that are used for programming or
debugging shall be completely removed after production.
Account hardening
 The RMU-RTU shall not contain active default, guest, and
anonymous accounts.
 All remote access to root accounts on the RMU-RTU shall
be disabled.
 All Vendor-owned accounts where feasible shall be
removed.
 The list of all accounts on the RMU-RTU shall be
provided.
f. Communication
(1) Compliance to Security standards
 The RTU shall follow the IEC 62351 standards and at
least:
IEC 62351-5: 2013
IEC 62351-8
(2) Communication Security
 The RTU shall support network and transport layer
encryption using IPsec.
g. Configuration:
 Access to the RMU-RTU by configuration tool shall be
possible only through secured connection: HTTPS for
Webserver and SSH for console and configuration tool.
h. Access control
(1) RBAC
 The RTU shall support the implementation of Role-based
Access Control in compliance with IEC 62351-8.

 It must be possible to configure the privileges of individual
roles. It must be possible to carry out changes by
configuration files through a secure way.
 It must be possible to define more roles for future
applications.
 It shall be possible to assign each role individual security
credentials.
 It shall be possible to bind roles to individual user accounts
on the RMU-RTU.
 The minimum following function and data shall be
controlled through RBAC:
 Configuration files.
 Software update.
 User management.
 Executing program or shell command.
 I/O on local maintenance access.
 A specific tool shall permit to configure the security
policy, role, and password.
(2) Management of Security passwords
 The RMU-RTU service application shall support
individual user passwords.
 Passwords shall be stored together with a salt using an
allowed cryptographic hash function.
 The RMU-RTU service application shall enforce a high
complexity of passwords.
 The RMU-RTU shall lock the access after several
password error.
(3) User Authentication
 The RMU-RTU shall authenticate the communication
parties on the WAN interface using a challenge-response
protocol based on message authentication codes The
RMU-RTU shall terminate the connection if the user
authentication fails.
 The RMU-RTU shall authenticate the communication
parties on the Local Maintenance interface.
 It shall be possible to configure the RMU-RTU so that it
blocks authentication requests, either temporarily or
permanently, from an account after a number of failed
login attempts. The number of failed login attempts and
the time the account is blocked shall be configurable.
(4) Central management of user account
 The RMU-RTU should allow managing user
authentication through a Radius server.
(5) Security Log
 The RMU-RTU shall provide a local audit trail for all
security events that occur.
 Log files shall be produced in Syslog format.
 Security events shall be logged locally in a dedicated
security log or/and on a SYSLOG server.
(6) Security testing
 The RMU-RTU shall comply with ACHILLE Level1.
5.4.4 RMU RTU signal list
Load Break Switch ON /
HW DI dual input
OFF Status
Earth Switch position (closed
HW DI dual input
/ open)
Local / Remote position HW DI dual input
Earth Fault Indicator alarms
COM
(EF & S.C F & Ph-Ph F)
Local command for Each
HW DO dual output
switch (close/open)
Remote commands for Each
HW DO dual output
FEEDERS switch (close/open)
Counting number of
Di
operations for Each Switch
cable door open alarm HW DI
LV compartment door open
HW DI
alarm
SF6 Gas Permissible dual input
pressure HW DI general for
( stage 1 / stage 2) sf6 vessel
COM
phases
Load Break Switch ON /
HW DI dual input
OFF Status
Earth Switch position
OUTGOING HW DI dual input
( closed / open)
LBS
Local / Remote position HW DI dual input
Local command
HW DO dual output
(close/open)

Remote commands
HW DO dual output
(close / open)
Counting number of
DI
operations
Fuse blown alarm HW DI
dual input
SF6 Gas Permissible
(if outgoing
pressure HW DI
is separated
(stage 1 / stage 2)
from vessel)
HW DI
alarm
COM
phases
C.B ON / OFF Status HW DI dual input
Earth Switch position
COM dual input
( closed / open)
Local / Remote position COM dual input
Local command
COM dual output
(close/open)
Remote commands
COM dual output
(close / open)
HW DI
alarm
Counting number of
DI
operations
Voltage Monitoring COM
OUTGOING
Current Monitoring COM
CB
COM
phases
dual input
SF6 Gas Permissible
(if outgoing
pressure HW DI
is separated
(stage 1 / stage 2)
from vessel)
Protection Relay OC trip COM
Protection Relay EF trip COM
Protection relay thermal
COM
External trip
protection relay trip by
COM
external input

CT'S & VT'S door open
HW DI
alarm
analogue input
Monitoring Voltage
through current
Measurements
transformer
analogue input
Monitoring Current through
Measurements Voltage
transformer
smart KWHM monitoring Analogue input
( I , V, KW, KVAR, P.F, through
Energy KWh) communication
Metering Panel
smart KWHM Alarms
Meter cover open
Meter Terminal Cover Open
Module Cover Open
Energy Reverses
COM
Under Voltage
Low Battery Alarm
Phase Sequence
Missing Potential
Low Credit
Battery disconnected COM
absence of input power COM
Power supply
Voltage output fault COM
and
communication Equipment
communication
Failure
of RTU COM
(for Each Device
communicated)
Transformer windings COM analogue
temperature input
Transformer Fans on / off status COM
Temperature Alarm COM
Temperature trip COM
LV measurement
( I , V, KW, KVAR, P.F, COM
Energy KWh)
MDB
smart KWHM monitoring COM
smart KWHM Remote
COM
Disconnect
smart KWHM Alarms
Meter cover open
Module Cover Open
Energy Reverses
COM
Under Voltage
Low Battery Alarm
Phase Sequence
Missing Potential
Low Credit
LV main incomer status
DI dual input
(On/OFF)
LV main incomer trip alarm DI

G. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER:
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. The transformer shall be dry type, cast resin and designed, manufactured,
constructed, and tested in accordance with IEC 60076 latest editions as are
relevant, except were modified by this specification.
C. Type test certificate from third party laboratories according to IEC 60076
and shall include noise level, temperature rise, impulse withstand on one
transformer of each rating to be delivered
D. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer. These
drawings shall include fully dimensioned external and internal general
arrangements showing all principal dimensions, weights,
foundation/cable/busbar entry details and the positions of all functional
devices, schematic drawings showing all windings, method of connection,
terminal markings, and IP rating.
E. Transformers in the context of this Specification shall comprise assemblies
of a magnetic core, primary and secondary windings, supporting
framework and enclosure.
F. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning
and subsequent maintenance of all equipment and materials described in
this specification shall comply with the requirements of, the electricity at
work regulations and the IEE wiring regulations.
1.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:
Cast Resin dry type transformer shall be used.
1.1.1 CHARACTERISTICS:
A. Rated Power (net site rating): As shown on drawings.
B. Type: 3-phase, Step down, two winding, indoor type.
C. MV windings shall be cast epoxy resin under vacuum.
D. LV windings shall be insulated with insulating foil impregnated
/ pre-impregnated with epoxy resin and heat cured afterwards.
E. Interturn Winding Insulation: class F as a minimum.
F. Winding Connections: DYN- 11 with neutral fully insulated and
brought out.
G. Ingress Protection (IP): 21
H. Frequency: 50 Hz.
Distribution transformer
I. Highest Voltage Um (rms):
a. MV Side 24 kV.
b. LV Side 1100 V.
J. Rated Voltage (no load):
a. MV Side 22 kV.
b. LV Side 400 V.
K. Impedance Voltage at Rated Current: 6 %.
L. Tap-Changer Positions: +3x 2.5% and -4x2.5% on primary.
M. Rated Power Frequency Withstand-Voltage: 50kV.
N. Rated Lightning Impulse Withstand-Voltage: 125 kV.
O. Short-Circuit Apparent Power of the System at Location: 750
MVA as a minimum.
P. Duration of Short-Circuit-Withstand: 2 seconds.
Q. Terminal Connection System:
a. MV Side: enclosed flanged terminal cable box, with split
cable glands and removable nonmagnetic plates with
adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables. Cable entry
shall be from top, or bottom as shown on drawings.
b. LV Side: enclosed flanged terminal cable box, with split cable
glands and removable insulating/nonmagnetic plates with
adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables or busway
adapter with flanged enclosure to suit arrangement as shown
on drawings.
c. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry
plates shall be made of Aluminum with adequate thickness
and rigidity to support cables.
d. An earthing terminal shall be provided at a convenient point
on the supporting steel work. All steel work shall be bonded
to the earthing terminal if it is not electrically continuous.
Provision shall be made for making an earth connection to the
neutral of the LV windings, should this be required.
1.1.2 CONSTRUCTION
Transformer core shall be constructed from high grade, non-aging
“Cold Rolled Grain Oriented” silicon steel laminations with suitable
grade to fulfill the losses and noise levels specified below:
A. The coefficients of expansion of the windings and epoxy resin
shall not differ by more than 15%.
B. The windings shall be made of copper or aluminum, utilizing
round or rectangular sections, or foil, as detailed in the attached
schedule(s).

C. Transformer shall be provided with mechanical forced
ventilation which shall be employed to further cool the
transformer windings and thus increase the performance rating
during short highly loaded periods.
D. The system shall comprise a number of single-inlet, single-width
centrifugal fans, each connected to a discharge duct situated
directly below the transformer coils, or axial fans, situated to
direct the air flow through the coils.
E. Fans shall be direct driven by an internally fitted external rotor
type motor with extended lubricators.
F. Cooling fans shall permit 40 % increase in rated power.
G. Each motor shall be supplied from a starter, complying with IEC
standards, and shall be housed in a purpose-mad cabinet also
accommodating automatic control elements and status indication
lamps.
H. For shaft powers below 1kW stamped formed strip impellers may
be used provided required efficiency and balance grade can be
achieved.
I. Transformer coils shall be sandwiches between the core
clamping channels but separated from them by insulated support
blocks. Rubber sound isolation pads shall be provided between
core and coil assemblies, and between base and housing.
J. Insulation and Encapsulation: Humidity resistant, explosion and
fire-resistant, self-extinguishing, tropicalized, giving non-toxic
gases in the event of fire. To fulfill environmental, climate and
fire classes of E2, C1 and F1 respectively to IEC 60076-11 / BS
EN 50588-1.
K. Transformer insulation resin shall be cast epoxy resin under
vacuum and shall ensure a minimum power frequency
breakdown stress 10KV/mm when tested to IEC 243.
L. The completed cast resin coil shall be self-extinguishing in the
event of fire. The testing method shall comply with IEC,
DIN/VDE standards. Type test certificates are required to
confirm the above.
M. Enclosure’s earthing bolt(s) or copper pad(s) shall be provided
on main frame of transformer for earthing of transformer’s
housing and core
N. LV star neutral point shall be connected to a separate earthing
terminal fixed to but insulated from the enclosure and shall be
labeled with the same

1.1.3 PERFORMANCE
A. The transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 726
in respect of partial discharge, impulse withstand short circuit
strength
B. Transformers shall be designed and manufactured to operate
continuously at the nameplate rating, in an ambient temperature
not exceeding 41 o C and RH not exceeding 85%, unless
otherwise specified.
C. The manufacturer shall confirm any de-rating necessary, should
the transformers be required to operate in conditions exceeding
those specified.
D. Transformer no load and load losses shall meet the Egyptian
Electricity Authority (EEA) requirements.
E. The manufacturer shall confirm low noise levels, Measurement
of sound levels shall comply with IEC 60076-10 (with fans off),
the sound power level with all fans in operation shall not exceed
6 dB additional to the specified limits.
F. Transformer Radiation of electromagnetic signals shall not
exceed the limits of IEC61000.
G. Provide surge arresters on MV side of transformers, surge
arresters shall be gap-less, metal oxide, heavy duty type,
porcelain housing with the following characteristics:
 Arrester Rated Voltage: 18 kV.
 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (Uc): 15.3 kV.
 Nominal Discharge Current (8/20 micro-sec peak): 5 kA.
 Energy Input Capacity: 3.5 kJ/kV.
H. HV and LV winding terminals shall be clearly marked with
characters in accordance with IEC. The characters shall be
stamped or engraved on securely fixed, durable and non-
corrodible plates.
1.2 THERMAL PROTECTION
A. Each transformer shall be provided with a Digital protective system of
thermal protection, temperature monitoring and fan controller
operation with display for indication of winding temperature values
and alarm / trip status.
B. Temperature sensing thermostats shall be mounted in each LV coil as
close as practicable to its hot spot. The thermostats shall be wired back
to an electronic controller fitted on the transformer.
C. The thermostats shall be used to indicate winding temperature, and
provide alarm and trip indications, and to operate forced cooling fans

and trip MV circuit breakers where specified. Volt-free contacts shall
be provided for relaying signals to remote equipment.
D. The transformer control panel shall transfer the data (Winding
temperature, statues for fans working/alarm/trip) to RMU-RTU and to
local BMS.
E. The temperatures at which the cooling fans shall be switched on and
off shall be adjustable within preset limits.
F. The power supply for the cooling fans shall be provided from the
particular transformer via a suitably fused switch. This switch shall
bear the inscription in yellow letters on a black background:
"WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS - DO NOT SWITCH OFF"
G. The starter assembly for the cooling the cooling fans shall comply with
this Specification. A warning label shall be fixed adjacent to the main
isolating switch bearing the inscription:
"WARNING - SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER COOLING FANS"
1.3 RTU Signal list

COM
Transformer windings
/analogue
temperature
input
Transformer
Fans on / off status COM
Temperature Alarm COM
Temperature trip COM

H. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER KIOSK:
1. PRODUCTS
1.1 KIOSK SPECIFICATIONS:
sections.
B. The transformer substation kiosk shall be prefabricated with glass fiber
reinforced pollster (GRP) housing or galvanized steel up to 24KV type
tested according to IEC 62271-202 ed.2.0 standard.
C. The compact secondary substation (CSS) expected operating lifetime is
30 years under the specified environmental, climatic, system and
service conditions specified, with minimum maintenance requirements.
D. The power rating of the CSS will be defined as per the rating of the
installed transformer so different power rating of the CSS is available
the kiosk shall be equipped with the following features:
 Type tested per latest IEC 62271-202 ed.2 and GB 17467-2010.
 Internal Arc Classification IAC-AB 20 kA, 1 second.
 High level of safety for equipment and personnel.
 All equipment inside CSS is type tested.
 Modular construction with compartmented design.
 Engineered footprint meeting required clearance standards.
 Engineered for smooth air flow and natural cooling.
 Can be lifted with transformer installed.
 Locking system for all doors to prevent un-authorized entry of
personnel.
 No access to live parts.
 Exposure to significant solar radiation, hot and humid climate or to
excessive moisture, including steam, salt spray, and dripping water.
 Weatherproof duplex receptacle.
 Space heater operating at one-half or less of rated voltage, sized to
prevent condensation, controlled by thermostats to maintain
temperature of each section above expected dew point.
E. Workshop drawings shall be provided for each transformer. These
drawings shall include fully dimensioned external and internal general
arrangements showing all principal dimensions, weights, foundation
/cable/busbar entry details and the positions of all functional devices,
schematic drawings showing all windings, method of connection,
terminal markings, and IP rating.

Distribution transformer kiosk
F. The design, manufacture, selection, installation, testing, commissioning
and subsequent maintenance of all equipment and materials described
in this specification shall comply with the requirements of, the
electricity at work regulations and the IEE wiring regulations.
G. Where more onerous requirements are specified herein, the conditions
of this specification shall take precedence.
H. The kiosks should be designed and tested according to IEC 62271-202
and to be complying with EEA requirements /specifications.
I. The kiosk are prefabricated metal-clad outdoor enclosures with
compact dimensions according to electricity authority requirements.
J. Sheet steel sections with weather-proof electrostatic coating, stone
paint, alum-zinc sheet steel.
K. Double roof system with natural air to facilitate the air circulation and
support the substation cooling system.
L. Valid for different types of distribution transformers.
M. The MV and LV compartments are arranged at both sides of the
substations with the transformer compartment in between.
N. The MV and LV compartments are provided with double doors. All
doors are equipped with stainless steel rigid hinges and rigid locking
devices. Also all doors are equipped with rubber gaskets to keep a high
degree of protection.
O. All circuit arrangement can be provided with earth fault indicators.
P. The transformer compartment is designed for a 3- phase dry type power
transformer.
Q. The transformer is connected to the LV distribution board via copper
busbars or cables based on the transformer capacity, and to the MV
equipment via XLPE screened cables, each of the XLPE cables is
equipped with two cable end box for three single phase connection.
R. Surge Arresters: Distribution Class; metal-oxide-varistor type,
connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of transformer.
S. All equipment in CSS shall be protected by fire search system, rating
and distribution are subject to life safety engineering approval.
T. For service purposes, sufficient space is provided to the personnel to go
in and work freely, necessary openings are provided for air entry and
exhaust, so that the temp. Rise is kept to a minimum.
U. Dust-rejecting ventilating louvers are situated at both ends of the
transformer compartment and dimensioned for self – cooling and shall
be provided with insect and rodent screens.
V. Two doors in both longitudinal sides of the transformer compartment
provide maximum flexibility to inspect and maintain the transformer.
W. The kiosk shall be provided with suitable way to connect security pad
lock on outside doors.
X. Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the on-off position of the
switches.
Y. The low voltage compartment shall have sliding button openings for
exit of outgoing feeder’s cables.
Z. The panel’s doors shall be earthed with mean of copper conductor with
cross section area at least (6mm²).
AA. The CSS shall be of glass reinforced either polyester (GRP)
construction or galvanized steel, this applies also to the roof, doors, and
ventilation louvers.
BB. The design of the CSS shall be based on the safety to personal and
equipment during operation and maintenance, it shall be internal arc
proof tested type (IACAB) to the arc current levels (IAC AB,20 KA at
1 sec) to provide a high level of personal safety to the public and
operators.
CC.The GRP enclosure material shall be inflammable as per IEC 62271-
5.104.2
1.2 KIOSK COMPONENTS:
A. Ring main units with metering cell: as specified in section
B. Dry type transformers: as specified in section, rating as indicated on the
drawings.
C. Low voltage compartment and bus bars: as specified in their relevant
sections.
D. Remote Terminal Unit (RTU): as specified in MVSG section.
1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
B. Spare Fuses: six of each type and rating of fuse and fusible device used,
except for medium-voltage fuses. Include spares for the following:
 Primary disconnect fuses.
 Potential transformer fuses.
 Control power fuses.
 Fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers.
 Fuses for secondary fusible devices.
C. Spare Indicating Lights: two of each type installed.

I. LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR (Main distribution board)
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. All main distribution boards shall be type-tested to IEC -61439.
C. The switchgears shall be 660 rated voltage and with 1000V rated insulation
voltage, class 3PH, 50HZ completely wired and type tested at the factory,
ready for installation on the site. Sectionalizing shall be accomplished, and
bracing provided for access of the equipment into the building.
2. PRODUCTS:
2.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. The switchgears shall be of the totally enclosed, front and rear.
accessible, indoor type, of size, rating, and form 2b arrangement. The
complete assembly shall be floor mounted, free standing, with
matching cases, to form a continuous integral structure.
B. Switchgears shall be completely enclosed with hinged front covers and
enclosures shall have mechanical impact resistance of IK10 to IEC
62262 for enclosures protection degree
C. IP 54 and higher, and IK08 to IEC 62262 for enclosures protection
degree lower than IP 54 otherwise steel plates of not less than 2 mm
gauge on sides, top and rear.
D. All fastenings between structural members shall be bolted, not welded,
to provide flexibility during installation.
E. The arrangement shall permit the busbars and/or cables to enter from
the top or bottom of the enclosures and connect at their respective
terminals without interference.
F. A modular arrangement shall be used to permit interchanging
differently sized device cover plates without additional drilling of
structure.
G. Structures and busses shall be arranged to permit future sections to be
added. A suitable cover plate shall be provided for temporary
protection.
H. Switchgears shall be dust, vermin, and rodent proof IP31 according to
IEC-60529 and IP 54 protection for installations in wet areas.
I. All compartments shall be suitably ventilated where required.
J. Switchgears shall be form 2-2b.

Low voltage switchgear
K. All main distribution boards shall be equipped with combined Class I
+ II surge protective along with their fused-disconnect switch shall be
integrated within or adjacent to the MDB’s enclosure.
L. Switchboard Main incoming circuit breaker Case shall be MCCB – Cat
B type for ratings up to 1250A and ACB type for ratings greater than
1250A.
M. All bolted and plug-in connections shall be Electro-silver plated.
N. Suitable arrangement and equipment shall be provided for extracting
and unloading the circuit-breakers from their cells.
O. A special trolley shall be supplied together with the switchgear for
removal or installation of the air-circuit breakers from their
compartment for maintenance or repair.
P. An earth bus extending the entire length of the assembly shall be
provided. The bus shall be sized in accordance with the Regulations.
Q. The switchgear shall be sanded, and rust inhibited after fabrication,
Electro - static painted on both inside and outside surfaces color shall
be Grey.
R. The Switchgear shall be provided with inlet air filtration.
S. Switchgear shall provide terminal box including all required points to
be collected from digital metering and main incoming CB and transfer
it to RMU RTU (refer to RTU section).
2.2 BUS BARS
A. All copper bus bars, switching devices and connections shall be of
sufficient sizes and silver plated at contact to limit the temperature rise
to 25 deg.C over an average ambient temperature of 35 deg.C outside
the enclosure for air-conditioned rooms and 45 deg.C for non-air-
conditioned rooms.
B. The bus bars rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.
C. All bus bars and connections shall be accessible for inspection and
maintenance purposes.
D. Bus bars are to be of high conductivity copper and rigidly supported to
withstand the mechanical stress of RMS value of the indicated short-
time withstand current for 1 sec. in accordance with IEC
recommendation No. 439-1
E. Main bus shall be of continuous construction. Main bus joints and all
top connections shall be silver plated and tightly bolted to insure
maximum conductivity.
F. Bus bars shall be clearly marked with their respective phase colors and
shall be furnished for future extensions.
G. Clearance to earth and to other live metal are to be in accordance with
the standards.

H. The main set of bus bars shall be housed in segregated chamber at the
top. Bus bar top covers shall be capable of supporting a man weight
without deflection.
I. Earth bus shall extend full length of board, firmly fixed to each section
in accordance with the Regulations and Standards, complete with two
main earthing lugs (one at each end) and required number of feeder
protective earth connectors.
J. Earth bus shall be half size of phase buses. the cross-sectional area of
neutral bus bars shall not be less than half size of the associated phase
bars wherever values of load balance and harmonics (THDi and THDv)
does not exceed permissible limits.
K. Connections from main and dropper busbars to the supply side of
functional units shall be by means of dedicated conductors. Conductors
installed on a loop in principle shall not be acceptable.
L. All neutral supply/load connections shall be made via the enclosure
containing the associated functional unit. Common neutral terminals
shall not be acceptable.
M. Where specified in the schedules, or shown on the drawings, switched
neutrals shall be provided. Otherwise, bolted neutrals shall be
provided. The bolted section shall be mounted in the compartment
containing the associated functional unit or as a separate functional unit
and be safe and easy to access.
N. No diversity shall be used in busbar dropper sizing.
O. All the bus bars shall be made from rectangular high grade electrolytic
copper with purity of at least 99.9%.
P. All the bus bars shall be insulated with heat shrinkable colored in red,
yellow, blue, and black for the 3-phases and natural bus bars,
respectively.
Q. The bus bars shall be mounted on insulators made from porcelain or
cast resin according to the IEC standard.
R. THDi and THDv at the main distribution board section of each
transformer (Point of Common Coupling) shall not exceed 10% with
each individual hormonic limited to 5%. In case the specified harmonic
limits cannot be achieved, the contractor is responsible for achieving
the specified limits by providing necessary filters on MDB bus.
Adopted solution shall be submitted for Engineer’s approval prior to
implementation.
2.3 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Air circuit-breakers shall be provided with solid state trip units fixed
type as indicated on the drawings, shall be type tested in accordance
with relevant IEC standards requirements.

B. All circuit breakers connected in one electrical circuit should be fully
selective and coordinated, if selectivity coordination study is failed for
any reason, contractor is responsible to add or change any number of
breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination shall be fully
achieved with no extra cost to the employer
C. ACBs shall be metal-clad, horizontal cassette type or fixed type with
positively driven "ON/OFF" indication.
2.3.1 withdrawable type:
A. Means shall be incorporated to prevent the wrong circuit-breaker
being racked in at fixed position.
B. Means shall be provided to padlock the breaker in the service,
isolated and test positions; and to close and independently
padlock the shutters as specified in the schedules. It shall not be
possible to withdraw or rack-in shall be prevented.
C. Robust padlocks or cylinder locks shall be provided to lock each
circuit-breaker in one or other position during on-site testing and
commissioning. This shall include locking the shutters closed
when a circuit-breaker is racked out. Two sets of keys shall be
provided for each padlock, together with a key cabinet and key
schedule.
D. ACBs shall be fitted with the protection devices solid state type,
instruments indicators and auxiliary control functions.
2.3.2 OPERATING MECHANISMS
A. ACBs shall be of the four-pole type as specified in the
schedules/drawings.
B. Where specified, operating mechanisms shall be the trip-free type
and shall have a latching current equal to the short-circuit
prospective value. Alternatively, the ACB shall be fitted with an
instantaneous digital trip or making current release which
operates when the ACB is closed onto a short-circuit. Anti-
pumping devices shall be fitted to all operating mechanisms.
C. The specific method of closing shall be as specified in the
schedules or drawings, as one of the following:
a. Type MSO: Manual, spring operated closing arrangement
with a handle for charging and releasing the spring in one
stroke.
b. TYPE MSM or MSE: Manual, spring operated arrangement
where the spring is charged to a latched position pending
mechanical/electrical initiation of closure. The spring system

shall incorporate the facility of charging for a second closure
when the breaker is closed.
c. TYPE MWS: motor wound charged spring as types MSM or
MSE. Motor wiring and control circuitry shall be internal.
d. TYPE SOC: solenoid operated from DC. when available or
rectified AC.
 Where ACBs with a spring stored energy closing mechanism
are used in an arrangement involving interlocking with other
ACBs, the manual discharge of the spring closing mechanism
shall be disabled by the interlocking system.
 Facilities shall be provided to remove or blank off the integral
mechanical "CLOSE" pushbutton where it could be used to
override protection devices, lockout relays or remote
operating signals.
 Mechanisms which store energy shall be fitted with stored
energy status indicators.
2.3.3 OPERATING FACILITIES
A. The ACB shall have facilities for isolation, withdrawal, and test
position operations with the ACB isolated. Carriage position
switches shall be provided for connection into appropriate
control circuits to permit electrical interlocks to be defeated when
the ACB is in the isolated and (where applicable) test positions
as specified in the schedules.
B. Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earthing facilities
shall be provided, to earth the circuit and busbars in the service,
test, and isolated positions.
2.3.4 PROTECTION AND TRIPPING
A. RELAYS:
a. Protective relay requirements shall be selected to ensure full
discrimination between system levels by the tenderer.
Protective relays shall be of the solid-state type with
adjustable for long time, short time and instantaneous
protection features, in addition to ground fault protection for
all breakers of 1000 AMP. and above. Relays shall comply
with IEC, NEC, NEMA, DIN/VDE standards.
b. All relays shall be provided with test facilities for use in
commissioning and testing from the front of the switchgear.
c. Relays shall be of the integral or external type.
B. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS

a. Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each
type of ACB at time of tender. The details shall include
manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing over
current and short-circuit discrimination and, additionally a
full set of overlay transparency discrimination curves to
enable discrimination settings to be checked.
b. All over current and short-circuit protective devices (relays as
item "A" above) shall have separately adjustable time and
current settings. Adjustments and settings shall be possible
from the front of the ACB. The setting adjustment devices
shall be behind a lockable cover plate, or similarly protected
against unauthorized access.
c. Energy for protective devices shall be obtained from integral
current transformers. Separate current transformers shall be of
the accuracy class specified in the schedules and comply with
IEC, DIN/VDE NEMA standards, and of suitable ratio and
rating for the operating conditions. If the circuit-breaker is de-
rated because of high temperature, then the current
transformers shall be replaced with ones suitable for the
higher operating temperatures. Protection current
transformers shall not be de-rated.
d. Under voltage, trip and closing coils which shall incorporate
adjustable time delay shall incorporates adjustable time delay
shall be wired out to secondary isolating contacts in the same
position on each breaker to ensure interchangeability of ACBs
with the same service performance characteristics.
C. STATUS INDICATION AND REMOTE CONTROL
a. ACB’s trip units shall be equipped with the Breaker
Communications Status Module to perform the following
functions:
 ON/OFF indication.
 Trip indication.
b. All signals to be transferred to RMU-RTU.
2.3.5 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A. On completion of the switchgear installation, each ACB shall be
provided with auxiliary contacts available for future use for both
the ACB contact operation and the isolation operation as

specified in the schedules/drawings. Wiring to the switching
contacts shall be ferruled and brought to a terminal block.
B. All auxiliary contacts shall be mounted in accessible positions
and away from possible electrical and mechanical danger.
2.4 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Moulded case circuit-breakers solid state type, all MCCB's shall
comply with IEC 60947-2 plus any additional requirements of this
Specification.
B. All MCCB's shall be equipped with solid state release (adjustable for
long time and short time and/or instantaneous protection depends on
the selectivity achievements features).
C. MCCB’s trip units shall be equipped with the Breaker
Communications Status Module to perform the following functions:
 ON/OFF indication.
 Trip indication.
D. All signals to be transferred to RMU-RTU.
E. Breakers of 1000A rating and above shall be provided with ground
fault protection as per NEC requirements.
F. All MCCB's connected in one electrical circuit shall be selected to
ensure full discrimination up to and including the prospective short-
circuit, and earth fault currents as specified on drawings and Schedules
for prospective earth fault currents the disconnection times shall not
exceed 5s.
G. All MCCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance level for
all incoming and outgoing. All circuit breakers in one electrical circuit
shall be fully selective and coordinated, if selectivity coordination
study is failed for any reason, contractor is responsible to add or change
any number of breakers, relays, such that the selectivity coordination
shall be fully achieved with no extra cost to the employer.
H. MCCB's shall be manufactured with double insulation of the front face,
insulating auxiliary components from the main power poles thereby
allowing as far as reasonable the fitting of auxiliary units on site
without full isolation of the unit.
I. The appropriate de-rating factors shall be applied to manufacturer's
standard ratings when selecting MCCB's to meet the specified ratings.
J. MCCB's shall be suitable for operation in both the horizontal and
vertical mounting position without detrimental effect on operation or
rating.
K. Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of
MCCB. The details shall include manufacturer's full current
discrimination tables showing overload and short-circuit

discrimination and, additionally, a full set of overlay transparency
discrimination curves or software program to enable discrimination
settings to be checked.
L. Contacts shall be arranged so that normal current is carried by low-
resistance silver alloy or other non-welding material while arcing is
handled by tungsten contacts.
2.4.1 TERMINALS
A. Terminals shall be sized to accommodate the size and type of
cable of incoming and outgoing circuits as specified in the
schedules or drawings. MCCB's shall be provided complete with
terminal shields.
B. Terminals shall be arranged for direct connection to busbars,
front or rear as required by the switchboard design.
C. All poles of multi-pole circuit-breakers shall be constructed so
that contacts open, close and trip simultaneously. It shall not be
possible for one or more poles to be closed while another remains
open and vice-versa.
2.4.2 OPERATING MECHANISMS
A. Operating mechanisms shall be over-center, quick-make, quick-
break type having operation in which speed of operation of the
breaker is independent of the operator.
B. Where solenoid operated MCCBs are specified in the schedules
or drawings, the operating voltage shall be as scheduled. Separate
solenoids shall be provided for opening and closing operations.
Built-in push buttons shall be provided for local operation.
C. Indication of the "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" conditions shall
be provided not only by the position of the handle but also by
means of a colored band, or line which shall be visible when the
circuit-breaker is on but not when it is off or tripped.
D. The "TRIPPED" condition shall be indicated by the handle
assuming a mid-point position between "ON" and "OFF" It shall
not be possible to manually place the handle in the tripped
position.
E. Indication shall be provided to confirm that all main contacts
have separated.
2.4.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Moulded case covers and non-interchangeable trip elements shall
be permanently sealed at works to prevent tampering, but the trip
elements may be changed/Adjusted and re-sealed on site by using
suitable tools.
B. All internal components of MCCB's shall be replaceable on site.
C. MCCB's shall be certified as satisfying the leakage current testes
called for in IEC 60947-2 with regards to safety isolation.
D. MCCB's used for motor starting shall satisfy the Type 2
coordination requirements called for in IEC 60947-2.the MCCB
and the starter shall preferably be of the same manufacture, and
in all cases shall be tested together and certified as satisfying the
co-ordination requirements.
E. All MCCB's shall be of the same manufacture and those of like
kind shall be of the same type. This requirement applies to loose
or individually mounted MCCB's as well as to those incorporated
within assemblies such as control panels, switchboards, and
distribution boards.
2.4.4 PROTECTION MECHANISMS
A. Each pole shall provide inverse time over current protection and
adjustable high set instantaneous tripping and in accordance with
item 2.1 (B) above. All poles shall be tripped simultaneously if
one detects a fault.
B. Trip units of ratings up to and including 250A shall be built in.
Trip units above 250A shall be replaceable.
C. Tripping mechanisms shall be selective limiting type to obtain
discrimination or by interconnection with other MCCB trip units.
D. All adjustable trips shall be visible and adjustable from the front
with the breaker in position. Adjustments to trip settings shall be
made to all poles simultaneously by means of a common
adjustment mechanism.
2.4.5 OPERATING FACILITIES
A. Facilities shall be provided for the use of a hand-held tester for
on-site testing of all operational features.
B. Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earth leakage trips,
shunt trips, undervoltage trips and remote operation shall be
provided. These accessories shall all be factory assembled and
tested.
C. Energy based limiting MCCB's which require replacement of the
current limiters after operatic shall not be re-settable until such
replacement has been made.
2.4.6 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided where specified in the
schedule or drawings, auxiliary contacts shall operate
simultaneously with the main breaker contacts.
2.5 METERING INSTRUMENTS
A. Generally: Instruments shall be housed in enameled, square, metal
cases for flush installation. Scales and markings shall be protected and
sealed. Accuracy of instruments shall be within 2% unless otherwise
specified.
B. Voltmeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 1.25
times nominal system voltage, 90-degree angle,
C. Voltmeter Selector Switch: 7-position rotary type.
D. Ammeters: Moving iron type, with center zero adjuster, range 2 times
nominal circuit amperage, 90-degree angle,
E. Provide ammeters and pilot lights for each phase.
F. Provide p.f. meter moving iron type with center zero adjuster, size 76
x76mm.
G. Current Transformer (CT): Indoor dry type, rated secondary current 5
A. Rated primary current, core size and accuracy shall be determined
in accordance with nominal current of plant protected, short-circuit
level and burden. With accuracy class (0.5) for metering and accuracy
class (5P) for protection
H. All CTs whether of the ring type or the wound primary type, for use at
voltages exceeding 1000 V shall be epoxy resin encapsulated.
I. Every CT shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total
burden of the instruments, relays, and/or other apparatus which it is to
serve.
J. Voltage Transformer (VT): Provide where required, complete with
primary and secondary fuses and disconnecting device. With accuracy
class (1) for metering and accuracy class (3P) for protection
K. Voltage transformers designed for a primary voltage not exceeding
4000 V shall be the air insulated type, with the windings encapsulated
in epoxy resin or other suitable synthetic material.
L. Unless otherwise specified, all voltage transformers shall be designed
for a secondary output voltage of 110 V.
M. Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater
than the total burden of the apparatus or instruments which it is to
serve.
2.6 DIGITAL METERING UNITS
A. Metering unit shall be provided on the incoming and outgoing feeders
having the following functions for each phase:
 Voltage.
 Current.
 Frequency.
 Energy.

 Total power.
 Peak power demand.
B. The metering unit shall be provided by adequate interface link with the
BMS/SCADA system.
2.7 WIRING
A. Arrangement: Wiring shall be modularly and neatly arranged on
master terminal boards with suitable numbering strips and appropriate
cartridge type fuses where required.
B. Connections shall be made at front of terminal board and with no live
metal exposed.
C. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. shall be
connected, by bare copper conductors not less than 2.5 mm2 section,
to nearest earthing bar.
D. Control Wiring: Copper, PVC insulated, 85 deg. C, 600 V grade, and
PVC sheathed for multi-core cables. Finely stranded copper conductor,
silicon rubber insulated cables shall be used in proximity to higher
temperature components and as flexible cable.
E. Ferrules: Wires shall be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type
at each termination.
F. Insulated conductors shall not rest against bare live parts or exposed
sharp edges.
G. All auxiliary wiring shall be contained within cabling trunking and
totally segregated from power wiring as far as practicable, wires shall
not occupy more than 25% of the trunking cross-sectional area. Wiring
of circuits at different voltage categories, e.g., L.V. and ELV, shall be
segregated. Joints will not be permitted on wiring between devices.
H. Where wiring passes through partitions it shall be protected against
abrasion by thermoplastic grommets and spiral wrapping.
I. Interconnections between functional units shall be contained within a
separate cabling chamber or trunking. All cables shall terminate on the
functional unit terminals within the cubicle.
2.8 LABELS
A. All enclosures containing functional units shall be clearly labeled with
a circuit, unit reference and current rating.
B. All labels shall be of the engraved type made from suitable multi-layer
laminate and shall be fixed with corrosion-resistant screws.
C. All terminal blocks shall be labeled relative to the respective functional
unit.
D. Every control and metering device, selector switch, pushbutton and
indicator light shall be clearly labeled to indicate its purpose.

E. Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together
with a rating plate.
2.9 COMPONENTS
A. All spare contacts on relays, contactors, and the like shall be wired to
easily accessible terminal blocks, suitably positioned for future
external wiring.
B. Assemblies shall be provided with a spare set of fuses mounted on
polyethylene coated spring clips adjacent to the fuse chart on the
doors of a separate cubicle. A total of 20% of each size of fuse shall
be provided with a minimum 4 number of each size.
C. Where Moulded case circuit-breakers are installed, they shall be
fitted with rotary action handles. The handles shall be lockable in the
"OFF" position.
D. Pushbuttons used for emergency stop purposes shall be of the
mushroom head type, with a twist to release action or key reset as
specified in the schedule.
E. Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts, in 'NO'
or "NC' configuration rated at not less than 5A resistive at 220V
50HZ.
F. Where single core cables are used, top / bottom cable entry plates
shall be made of Aluminum or other approved non-ferrous material
with adequate thickness and rigidity to support cables.
2.10 DIGITAL VOLTAGE RELAY
This unit shall be provided on the incoming and coupler section to
perform the following functions, and to be connected to BMS for
monitoring:
A. Over-voltage (adjustable from 90 to 120%, with time delay
adjustable from 0.5-5 Sec).
B. Under-voltage (adjustable from 75 to 95%, with time delay
adjustable from 0.5-5 Sec) with auto reclosure after fault elimination.
C. Phase Voltage unbalance (detect voltage unbalances over 10%).
D. Phase reversal.
2.11 SELECTOR SWITCHES / PUSH-BUTTONS / INDICATOR
LAMPS
A. The manufacturer's range shall include fully interchangeable contact
blocks and lamp holder blocks which can be fitted to all actuators
including switches and pushbuttons.

B. Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, with lever or key
operated actuators as specified in the schedules or shown on the
drawings.
C. Pushbuttons shall be of the flush type. Colors shall be as specified in
the schedules and to IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
D. Pushbuttons used for emergency stop purposes shall be of the
mushroom head type, with a twist to release action or key reset as
specified in the schedule.
E. Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts, in 'NO'
or "NC' configuration rated at not less than 5A resistive at 220V
50HZ.
F. Indicating lamps shall be of the flush type 22mm diameter with
removable colored lenses, allowing lamps to be changed from the
front and shall be provided with a push to test facility.
G. Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
H. Indicating lamps on control circuits shall be equipped with
completely sealed dual wound safety isolating transformers and in-
built test relay.
I. Fuse failure lamps shall be of the neon type with current limiting
device.
2.12 WIRING TERMINALS
A. Cable terminations and space for terminations shall be suitable for
the sizes of cable called for in the design, refer to Cable Schedules.
B. Terminal blocks shall be made of thermosetting melamine or
polyamide material with a low tracking index and good flame
resistance, tested to withstand a temperature rise of 90 deg.C above
ambient temperature.
C. Provision shall be made for permanent labels to be applied to each
terminal for identification purposes.
D. All terminals shall be marked in accordance with DIN/VDE
standards.
E. All terminals for control wiring shall have provision for plug-in test
spills and in addition be fitted with isolating links. Current carrying
parts shall be made of tinned brass or copper.
F. Completely shrouded terminals of the tunnel type shall be used for
cup to 10mm². The screw clamp connection shall be vibration proof,
self-locking and suitable for clamping two conductors.
G. Stranded cables up to 10mm² shall be terminated in copper or copper
alloy ferrule shall retain all strands of the cable.
H. Terminals for cables more than 10mm² shall be of the double
connection type with bolted studs for the connection of cable lugs.
The terminal and stud size shall be adequate for the current carried
and the size of cable. Suitable insulating partitions and protective
covers shall be provided.
I. All auxiliary wiring except screened cables shall be connected to
incoming/outgoing cables Via insulated terminal blocks,
screw/screw type, clipped onto DIN rails. There shall be sufficient
space on the DIN rail for future terminal blocks of not less than 10%
or 5 No. whichever is the greater.
J. Wires shall enter terminals singly.
K. Plugs and fixed sockets for the application shall be provided for the
termination of screened cables.
L. All terminations shall be mounted at least 0.2m above the base of
floor mounted assemblies.
M. All load terminals shall be suitable for the types and sizes of cables
as specified in the schedules and drawings.
2.13 RTU SIGNAL LIST
LV measurement (I, V, KW,
COM
KVAR, P.F, Energy KWh)
smart KWHM monitoring COM
smart KWHM Remote Disconnect COM
smart KWHM Alarms
Meter cover open
Module Cover Open
Energy Reverses
MDB
COM
Meter Over Voltage and Under
Voltage
Low Battery Alarm
Phase Sequence
Missing Potential
Low Credit
LV main incomer status (On/OFF) DI dual input
LV main incomer trip alarm DI

J. ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES:
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. Busway types as follow:
 Feeder type for non-tapped straight runs and direct connections between
equipment, as applicable and / or shown on the drawings, indoor type
complete with manufacturer's recommended fittings and accessories were
indicated.
 Plug-in type for tap off applications as applicable and / or shown on the
Drawings, indoor, complete with manufacturer's recommended fittings and
accessories were indicated and as required for a complete, functioning, and
safe installation.
C. Busway shall include bus bars, enclosures, electrical insulators,
switchboard flange, elbows, offsets, transformer flange connections with
flexible copper braid link, generator flange connection with flexible copper
braid link and vibration absorber, power take-off sections, phase
transposition, expansion joints, end closures, supports, and other
components and accessories needed to form complete systems, and as
shown on drawings.
D. Ratings: three phases with voltage and current ratings and requirements for
neutral and ground conductors as indicated and specified.
E. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications and shall be signed
by the Manufacturer\supplier and the contractor.
F. Type Test Certificates: Submit to verify compliance of the system with the
relevant Standards.
G. Busway Conductor Material: Copper or aluminum alloy with a copper
cladding (Bi- Metal), 56% minimum conductivity.
H. Busways: silver plated at connections for aluminum and insulated over
entire length, with flame retardant 130 deg C class epoxy/mylar insulation.
I. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not to exceed limits specified in the Standards
which the busway is designed to at any point in the busway when busway
is operated at rated load current and system frequency.
J. Current Densities of Busway Conductors: Rated current carrying capacities
of the Busway shall not exceed 1.6A/mm2.

Electrical specifications Distribution
Enclosed bus assemblies
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 BUSWAY
A. Type: Indoor, 1000 V grade L-L, 3-phase, 4-wire (3P+N) 4WH with
Housing Ground for feeder busway, insulated, totally enclosed, non-
ventilated and of compact design to provide degree of protection of
IP54 to IEC 60529, with ratings as shown on the Drawings at site
maximum ambient temperature conditions (50 C inside). Considering
the contribution of the enclosure as earthing means. Short-circuit
capacity shall be certified by an approved third party and shall be at
least equal to the value at the upstream point of connection or as shown
on the Drawings, whichever is greater, for 1 second. The neutral shall
be Full size of the life bar size.
B. Construction: Prefabricated, Copper or insulated flat aluminum alloy
conductors with a copper cladding (Bi- Metal) with 56% minimum
conductivity, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, sandwich type. Housing
shall be bonderized inside and outside and finished with gray baked
electrostatic paint, unless otherwise proposed by the supplier and
approved by Engineer. Busbars shall be provided with extra insulation
between busbars and housing along the full length. Joints between
sections shall have special insulation, flanged and pressure bolted,
easily dismantled, and giving equally strong mechanical connection to
busway sections. Any section of the busway shall be removable
without disturbing adjacent sections. The busbar joint shall be of an
approved type assembly, to maintain proper pressure over a large
contact area.
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next shall be silver
platted and arranged in joint stacks incorporating busway conductors,
and each joint stack shall be arranged for tightening with a single bolt.
Joint design shall be such that any length or fitting oof a run may be
removed without disturbing the connecting lengths.
D. Reactance: Busway shall be specially built and assembled to provide
low reactance.
E. Accessories: Busway shall be complete with necessary factory-made
adaptor boxes, junction boxes, bends, expansion connections, fittings,
fire barriers etc. Fixing and mounting materials shall be galvanized
steel. For vertically mounted busways, spring suspension type hangers
shall be used for equalizing weight of trunking between all supports.
F. Terminal adaptors or chambers shall be factory made. Coordinated
components at both ends shall match equipment connected thereto.
Connections shall be made with insulated copper bars of equivalent
sections and of exact shapes to fit and be fixed with bolts and spring

washers. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the
two manufacturers.
G. Busway shall be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths
and shapes. Busway cutting on site is not acceptable.
H. Phase Transposition: Busways intended to change the relative
positions of the phase conductors to balance the inductive reactance’s
or to transpose the phases shall be provided with phase transposition
unit.
2.2 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. General: as recommended by busway manufacturer and conforming to
Section "Basic Electrical Requirements ".
B. Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: Adjustable for leveling and
spring tension and arranged to permit relative movement between floor
and busway.
C. Rigid Floor Supports: Adjustable for leveling.
D. Expansion Section: Capacity and conductor provisions same as
adjacent busway section. Arranged to absorb expansion and
contraction of bus bars and housing.
E. Expansion joints shall be installed where busduct pass through
building structure expansion or every 60 meters runs.
F. Any flexible connection shall be through flexible copper braid type.
G. Fasteners to connect busway supports to the building structure as
follows:
 Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.
 Toggle Bolts: All steel spring head type.
 Powder Driven Threaded Studs: Heat treated steel, designed
specifically for the intended service.
2.3 FIRE STOPPING
A. General: Materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated
barriers. Refer to Section "Basic Electrical Requirements ".
B. Wall and Floor Flanges: Sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum
thickness close fitting to busway arranged to close the wall or floor
opening at the busway penetration.
C. Two-Part Sealant: Formed-in-place sealant matching the type used
during the fire resistance in building penetrations test in accordance
with IEC 61439-6.

K. FEEDER PILLARS AND LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR
AND OUTDOOR TYPE)
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. Rated insulation voltage shall be in accordance with the respective
standards.
C. Tests and Certificates: Submit complete certified manufacturer's type test
and routine test records in accordance with the Standards.
D. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the
manufacturer / manufacturer’s authorized representative and the
contractor.
E. Earthing bar shall be half size the phase busbars.
F. Neutral bar shall be sized as the phase bus bars.
G. Busbars Type shall be One piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on
total maximum operating temperature of. 70 deg C at any point of the bus,
at full continuous rating. Bolted or clamped contact surfaces shall be
properly tin or silver plated as necessary, and shall have maximum current
density not exceeding requirements of the approved standards.
H. Busbar rating shall be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size.
Where no main circuit breaker is required, busbars shall have main lugs or
disconnect switch, with nominal rating equal to 1.25 times the upstream
circuit breaker trip rating, and as shown on the drawings.
I. Busbars shall carry at least 125% of the maximum short-circuit level at
point of application for one second, without showing any signs of
degradation.
J. Feeder pillars and distribution panels shall be protected against earth fault
current, in addition to over current and short circuit protection, on each
outgoing circuit, in accordance with the Regulations.
K. A surge protection type-II shall be provided at main incoming of Feeder
pillars supplying street\outdoor lighting.
1.1 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. MCBs shall be 220/240 - 380/415 V A.C. rated tropicalized for
operation at ambient temperatures up to 70 degree C, within
panelboard enclosure and humidity up to 95%, and shall be
constructed from high quality, high temperature, molded insulating
materials. Guaranteed duties and characteristics shall be submitted for
temperatures at and above 40 deg C.

Feeder pillars and lighting panels
B. MCBs shall have Type Tested. Manufacturer's tripping characteristics
shall be provided for each type of MCB specified.
C. Minimum short-circuit breaking capacities to IEC 60898-1shall be 10
kA.
D. Service and ultimate short-circuit capacities shall be as specified in the
switchboard details.
E. All MCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance level for
incoming and outgoing for each panel.
F. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers
shall be add-on devices, or built-in and integral with the standard
circuit breaker. Non-adjustable sensitivities of 30 mA, 100 mA and 300
mA shall be available for all ratings of 2-pole and 4-pole circuit
breakers.
G. In multi-pole MCBs, including four-pole, all poles shall open, close
and trip simultaneously.
1.2 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum short-circuit capacities of circuit breakers shall be as
indicated on the drawings.
B. All MCCB's connected in one electrical circuit shall be selected
to ensure full discrimination up to and including the prospective
short-circuit, and earth fault currents as specified on drawings
and Schedules for prospective earth fault currents the
disconnection times shall not exceed 5s.
C. All MCCB’s should be rated at service short circuit entrance
level for all incoming and outgoing.
D. Breakers of 1000A rating and above shall be provided with
ground fault protection as per NEC requirements.
1.2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Circuit Breaker Trip Units: moulded case circuit breakers of
incoming \ outgoing circuits of panel boards (LPs, ELPs), power
panel boards (PPs, EPPs) and sub-distribution panel boards
(SDPs) shall be thermal magnetic type, Main moulded case
circuit breakers of (LPs, ELPs, PPs, EPPs, DPs) shall be
electronic type.
B. Thermal magnetic circuit breaker trip units: shall have bi-
metallic inverse time delay overcurrent element for small
overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-current trip element
for operation under short-circuit conditions on each pole. Circuit
breakers rated 160 A shall have adjustable instantaneous trips.

C. Deration: Thermal and Electronic over-current trips shall be
ambient temperature derated at specified ambient conditions and
corresponding temperature within the enclosures.
D. MCCB shall not be derated if the space where the panels are
installed is air-conditioned.
E. Electronic trips units shall be solid state with long time delay
settings between 0.5 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short
time delay range of 3 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a
maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds, and instantaneous
protection adjustable from 5 to 10 times continuous rating.
F. Solid state trip units shall be insensitive to changes in ambient
temperature between -20 and +55 deg C.
G. Earth fault protection shall be built into trip unit where specified
and shall be suitable for connection to external current sensor.
H. Push-to-trip button shall be provided on cover for testing the trip
unit.
I. Short time over current protection is only required for circuit
breakers 630A and above.
J. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with
positive trip-free operation so that contacts cannot be held closed
against excess currents under manual or automatic operation.
K. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-
quenching devices of metallic grid construction.
L. Trip current rating (amps) indicates nominal maximum rating at
which overload element is set to operate.
M. Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral
overcurrent protection (RCBOs) type A to IEC 61009 are
provided as add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where
required.
N. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-current
and short-circuit protection, shall be in accordance with the
Regulations.
O. Trip current sensitivity on breakers for branch circuits shall be as
shown on the Drawings, and for main breakers ratings shall be as
shown on the Drawings.
P. Circuit breakers shall include current transformer with tripping
coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure
circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
Q. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Molded case type without
fusible elements.
R. When operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-
through current shall be less than 1/2 cycle wave of symmetrical

protective short-circuit current as compatible with breaker
construction.
1.3 CONTACTORS
A. Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a for
discharge lamps, class AC 5b for tungsten halogen lamps and class AC
3 for motors to IEC 60947-4 and rated not less than overload setting of
protective devices upstream.
B. Contacts shall be double break, silver cadmium plated, having self-
cleaning wiping action.
C. Control shall be provided by phase neutral (maximum 230 V) split coil,
for on/off activation by local and/or by remote direct wired, on/off push
buttons. Contactor shall be mechanically latched. Control circuit shall
be fused.
D. Auxiliaries shall include local pilot light, parallel remote indicating
circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.
1.4 FEEDER PILLAR:
A. Feeder pillars shall be provided with number of fuses rated as specified
by EEA.
B. Feeder pillars shall be designed for three different sizes as follows:
a. 200 KVA rating, with copper bus of size 10x50mm
b. 160 KVA rating, with copper bus of size 10x50mm
c. 100 KVA rating, with copper bus of size 5x50mm
C. Feeder pillars shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC,
DIN/VDE standards.
D. All interior components shall be mounted on a rigid fabricated chassis
capable of being removed and/or reversed for ease of wiring.
E. Feeder pillars shall be provided with a full phase size neutral bar, and
half phase size earth bar, adequate provision for the connection of a
circuit protective conductor for each outgoing feeder.
F. Terminals for the neutral conductor shall allow the individual
connection of conductors having a current carrying capacity equal to
the full current carrying capacity of the phase conductor.
G. Distribution Box cases shall be fabricated from zinc-coated or heavily
rust-proofed heavy gauge sheet steel and be of all-welded construction.
They shall be adequately braced or stiffened, by folding or otherwise,
to form a completely rigid enclosure. Exterior corners and edges shall
be rounded to give a smooth overall appearance.
H. The sheet steel shall be not less than 2 mm thickness.
I. Feeder pillars shall have a side-hung hinged front cover, attached by
means of lift-off hinges, and fitted with cylinder type locking handles
and provided with lock and key or other approved means. Covers shall
be braced or folded in such a manner as to prevent distortion or whip
and shall be fitted with dust-proofing gaskets or edge seals.
J. Distribution Box cases shall provide a degree of protection IP54.
K. Distribution Box cases shall be of such dimensions that adequate space
is available for maneuvering and connecting the incoming and
outgoing cables.
L. Feeder pillars shall be arranged for bottom entry according to the
requirements specified.
M. Feeder pillars shall be provided with detachable end plates as specified
in the schedules or drawings.
N. Each distribution Box shall be provided with an engraved plastic
label on the outside of the front cover, bearing the designation of the
Box and its reference number, if any, as given on the drawings or in
the schedules.
O. The label shall be fixed in position by chromium-plated set screws.
P. Each such label shall be not less in size than 100 mm x 30 mm and
shall bear the required inscription in white on a black background,
using letters and/or digits not less than 5 mm high.
Q. Distribution Box covers shall incorporate locking facilities as specified
by EEA.
R. Feeder pillars shall be provided with led lamp for integrated internal
inspection lighting with wire guard and adequate cord length and one
weatherproof socket outlets.
1.5 LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR TYPE)
A. Lighting panels shall be miniature circuit-breaker (MCB), or Moulded
case circuit breaker boards as specified in the schedules or drawings.
B. Lighting panels shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC
standards.
C. All interior components shall be mounted on a rigid fabricated chassis
capable of being removed and/or reversed for ease of wiring.
D. Lighting panels shall be provided with a suitable earth bar and neutral
bar, with adequate provision for the connection of a circuit protective
conductor for each outgoing way.
E. Terminals for the neutral conductor shall allow the individual
connection of conductors having a current carrying capacity equal to
the full current carrying capacity of the phase conductor.
F. When the means of isolating the lighting panels from the incoming
supply is not to be mounted immediately adjacent to the board, means
shall be provided in the lighting panels to indicate whether or not the
supply is "ON".
G. Lighting panels cases shall be fabricated from zinc-coated or heavily
rust-proofed heavy gauge sheet steel and be of all-welded construction.
They shall be adequately braced or stiffened, by folding or otherwise,
to form a completely rigid enclosure. Exterior corners and edges shall
be rounded to give a smooth overall appearance.
H. Lighting panels shall have a side-hung hinged front cover, attached by
means of lift-off hinges, and fitted with cylinder type locking handles.
Covers shall be braced or folded in such a manner as to prevent
distortion or whip and shall be fitted with dust-proofing gaskets or edge
seals.
I. Lighting panels cases shall provide a degree of protection IP31.
J. Lighting panels cases shall be of such dimensions that adequate space
is available for maneuvering and connecting the incoming and
outgoing cables.
K. Lighting panels shall be arranged for top or bottom or top and bottom
entry according to the requirements specified on the drawings or in the
schedules.
L. Lighting panels shall be provided with detachable end plates as
specified in the schedules or drawings.
M. Each lighting panels shall be provided with a durable circuit chart fixed
to the inside of the cover or immediately adjacent and bearing
typewritten details, in plain language, of the circuits supplied by each
of the ways.
N. The chart shall be on heavy weight paper or thin card and shall be
protected by means of a rigid transparent plastic cover, it shall be
mounted in such a way that it can easily be removed for correction or
alteration, then replaced. The size of the chart shall be such that there
is adequate space of recording all the required information and, in any
case, shall not be less than A5 (210 mm x 148 mm).
O. Each way in the lighting panels shall be clearly numbered to
correspond with the numbering on the circuit chart.
P. Each lighting panels shall be provided with an engraved plastic label
on the outside of the front cover, bearing the designation of the board
and its reference number, if any, as given on the drawings or in the
schedules. The label shall be fixed in position by chromium-plated set
screws. Each such label shall be not less in size than 100 mm x 30 mm,
and shall bear the required inscription in white on a black background,
using letters and/or digits not less than 5 mm high.
Q. Lighting panels covers shall incorporate locking.
1.6 STREET LIGHTING PANELS (OUDOOR TYPE):
A. Type: Rated insulation voltage rating 690V as a minimum. 3-phase and
neutral (TPN), with 3-pole MCCB on main incoming.
B. Construction: the street lighting panel shall be totally enclosed, dead
front type, fully self-contained, dust-proof, weatherproof and suitable
for mounting outdoors exposed to dust, rain and sunlight with IP54
degree of protection to IEC 60529 and IEC 62208.
C. Cabinets: Reinforced free-standing structure with high mechanical
impact resistance IK10 to IEC 62262, or manufactured from 2 mm
nominal thickness galvanized sheet steel, electrostatically powder
coated and corrosion resistant internally and externally.
D. Feeder pillars shall be provided with bolted reinforcement corner
construction and shall be of the dwarf type with a bolting down root
for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base suitable for all incoming
and outgoing cables from below ground level directly buried or in a
duct system.
E. Street lighting panels shall have suitable extension cable box for cable
entry from below.
F. Cabinets shall have two hinged lockable opening doors to provide full
front access to the cabinet and shall be sized according to the
equipment being installed. The roof of the cabinet shall be slanted and
shall have water drip edges.
G. Lighting Contactors: 2 or 3-pole, Electro-magnetic type, class AC 5a,
Contacts shall be double break, silver cadmium plated, having self-
cleaning wiping action. Control shall be provided by phase-neutral
(maximum 230 V) split-coil, for on/off activation by local and/or by
remote direct-wired, on/off push buttons.
H. Contactor shall be mechanically latched. Control circuit shall be fused.
I. Auxiliaries shall include local pilot light, parallel remote indicating
circuit, 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts.
J. Internal Cabling: PVC/PVC single core 600/1000volt grade with
copper conductors and rated as required considering manufacturers
recommended temperature and bunching derating factors. All internal
wiring shall be suitably laced or clipped.
K. Control: LV panel circuits serving the street and outdoor lighting shall
be supplied through triple pole contactors which shall be photo-
electric, timer controlled along with SCADA control, The contactors
shall be operated through either timer or photoelectric cell or remote
signal from SCADA.
L. An over-ride facility shall be provided for maintenance.
M. Timers shall be solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric
display and have the following features:
 Two contacts rated 30-A unless otherwise indicated.
 Two pilot-duty contacts rated 2-A unless otherwise indicated.
N. Street lighting panels shall have a 50 mm x 6 mm full length high
conductivity tin plated copper main earth bar for grounding purposes
complete with test.

O. A distribution diagram shall be permanently fixed to the inside of the
door showing all circuit connections, incoming\outgoing ratings, cable
sizes and references, etc.
P. Street lighting panels shall be vandal proof and secured against
unauthorized access by means of wedge locks protected by brass plugs
and operated by a special key as approved by the Engineer or as
required by the local authority.
Q. Street lighting panels used for external lighting or combined external
lighting and power distribution shall have single or multi split bus
arrangement with uncontrolled bus section to provide necessary power
supply for internal lighting, socket outlets and lighting control system.
R. Street lighting panels shall be provided with led lamp for integrated
internal inspection lighting with wire guard and adequate cord length
and one weatherproof socket outlets.

L. EXTERIOR LIGHTING:
1. PRODUCTS
A. Equipment Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated submit complete
data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Detailed literature, in English, for each type of luminaire or fixture,
lamp and control gear including manufacturer's name, catalogue
number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating
characteristics and principles, and any modification to a standard
product if applicable.
b. Detailed specification and drawings for each column type including
shape, base/mounting flanges, bolts, nuts etc., cross-sections, design
criteria and calculations, brackets, finishes, provisions for cabling, cut-
out, or circuit-breaker etc.
c. Materials, finishes, and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
d. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps
for electrical ratings and photometric data, including IP rating
certification.
e. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for
photometric performance.
f. For LED fixtures / Systems: photometric test reports from accredited
third-party laboratories to verify the fixture / system photometric and
electrical characteristics as well as the temperature of LEDs inside; the
testing shall conform to LM-79-08 and LM-82-12 as well as ISTMT to
UL1958 or similar and approved international equivalent standards.
Report shall include laboratory name, report number, date, luminaire
catalogue number, luminaire, light source specifications, photos for
tested sample …...etc.
g. For LED chips: submit manufacturer test reports for lifetime of LEDs,
LM-80-08 and TM-21-11.
h. Obstruction lights certificates from the manufacturers certifying their
compliancy to ICAO and FAA.
B. Calculations: The contractor shall perform the lighting calculations in case
the submitted lighting fixture have different characteristics than specified,
by using the latest version of the DIALux lighting design software and
submitted for all typical lighting installations of the project with the IESNA
LM-79 for the luminaire photometric files used in the calculations as per
the final approved luminaires for all areas of installation in the project.
C. Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the
manufacturer/ manufacture’s authorized representative and the Contractor.

Exterior lighting
D. Samples: a sample will be required for the purpose of ascertaining its
performance, quality of parts and details, maintenance features, method of
installation and safety features. Samples must be wired for simple plug-in
operation for evaluation purposes. Samples to be shipped prepaid by the
Contractor to the Employer’s Representative, or as otherwise advised. No
payment shall be required for samples, and will be submitted at no
additional cost to the Employer. Samples submitted for evaluation
purposes will not be returned unless a prepaid shipping number is provided
by the Contractor, nor are they to be included in the quantities listed for the
project.
E. Contractor must submit certificates according to the followings:
a. Test certificates for the proposed LED lighting luminaires according to
IEC standard as follows:
 IEC 62717: Requirements for the performance of LED modules,
 IEC 62722-1: General requirements for the performance of
luminaires,
 IEC 62722-2-1: Particular requirements for the performance of LED
luminaires.
 ENEC PLUS.
 EN 12464-1: Light and lighting - Lighting of workplaces Part 1:
Indoor workplaces.
 EN 12464-2: Light and lighting - Lighting of workplaces Part 2:
Outdoor workplaces.
b. Test certificates for the proposed LED lighting luminaires according to
IES standard as follows:
 LM-79-08 Test Report or any approved equal test according to its
relevant code, showing electrical and photometric performance for the
whole luminaires.
 LM-80-08 Test Report or any approved equal test according to its
relevant code, showing measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED light
sources, conditions and time of failure.
 TM-21 Test Report, showing projecting long term lumen maintenance
of LED light sources.
 LM-82 Test Report showing the characters of LED light engines and
LED
 lamps for electrical and photometric properties as a function of
temperature in form of Lumens/Watt efficacy at In Situ Temperature.
 Thermal Management Test report, In Situ Temperature Management
Test Report (ISTMT) under UL 1958 is preferred or equivalent.
c. EN 55015 “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance
Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment”.

Exterior lighting
d. IEC 62471 “Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems”.
e. Color binning of LEDs to be 6-step max on Mac-Adam ellipse.
f. Sand and dust proof to IEC 60068-2-68.
g. IP and IK to IEC 60598 and IEC 62262 respectively.
h. For LED Drivers:
 IEC 61347-1 “Lamp Control gear - Part 1: General and Safety
Requirements”.
 IEC 61347-2-13 “Lamp Control gear - Part 2-13: Particular
Requirements for D.C. or A.C. Supplied Electronic Control gear for
LED Modules”.
 IEC 62384 “DC or AC Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED
Modules - Performance Requirements”.
 IEC 61000-3-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3-2:
Limits - Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (Equipment Input
Current ≤ 16 A per Phase)”.
 EN 55015 “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance
Characteristics of Electrical Lighting and Similar Equipment”.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of lighting units certifying
that products comply with requirements and that all lighting fittings and
fitting Drawings have been coordinated with the Drawings and details of
the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and other related
trades to assure an accurate and efficient installation.
G. Closeout Submittal:
a. Maintenance Manual: Prior to the completion of the project submit, for
incorporation into the overall project maintenance manual,
recommended maintenance requirements from the Manufacturers of
each fitting type, including:
 A quantity of two (2) of any special tools required.
 Types of cleaners to be used.
 Replacement parts identification lists and contacts for all fittings,
including all lamping.
 Recommended maintenance schedule and procedures.
H. Maintenance Data: For lighting units to include in maintenance manuals
specified and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements.
I. As-Built (Record) Drawings: At Project close-out, submit Record
Drawings of installed lighting, in accordance with requirements of the
Specification.

Exterior lighting
1.1 FLOODLIGHTS
A. Type: Totally enclosed type, weather, dust and shock resistant, IP 65
to IEC 60529 (unless otherwise shown on drawings), with aiming
adjustment facility and “lock-in-place” arrangement.
B. Housing: High pressure die-cast aluminum alloy (color shall be
approved by the Engineer) closed on front by hinged framed protector
highly resistant to thermal and mechanical shocks and set in position
by at least eight heavy-duty stainless-steel spring clamps with silicon
sealing gasket. Enclosure shall be in accordance with IEC 60598-2-5
and shall be suitable for operation in specified ambient conditions.
C. Reflectors: High purity (over 99% reflectance) anodized aluminum,
secured in precision aligned internal tracks to provide beam
distribution required.
D. Connection box shall be located at rear of floodlight body with gland
connections suitable to accept the supply cables. Lamp and control
gear to be mounted in two separate and isolated compartments within
the luminaire enclosure, unless specifically stated otherwise.
E. Control Gear: Plug-in type, 220 V, 50 Hz, power factor compensated
to at least 0.9 lagging.
F. Ballasts and ignitors are to be type specially adapted for make of lamps
selected. Ignitors are to be electronic thyristor type. Lamp shall be able
to start with at least +/-10% line voltage, and with normal operation
dips up to 20% for four seconds. Compensation shall ensure that there
is no large increase in operating current during starting. Control gear
losses are not to exceed 10%. Cables for internal wiring in control gear
compartments are to be single core 2.5 mm2 copper conductors with
high temperature insulation and sheath. Control gear shall be certified
suitable for operation at specified ambient conditions.
G. Finish: Exposed metal parts of floodlights are to be painted with U.V.
stabilized, corrosion and heat resistant paint (color shall be approved
by the Engineer), resisting operating temperatures attained in direct
sunlight while lamp is burning.
H. Mounting: Floodlights are to be located as shown on the Drawings and
mounted on specially designed brackets to allow swiveling in any
desired direction and locking firmly in final position. Protractor scale
shall be provided for accurate setting.
I. Earthing Terminals: Bolted earthing terminal shall be provided in each
fitting.
J. All fixtures shall be clearly labeled by manufacturer, clearly stating
make, model and country of manufacture.

Exterior lighting
1.2 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LIGHTING SYSTEM:
A. Light emitting diode shall be a solid-state device embodying a p-n
junction, emitting optical radiation when excited by an electric current.
It shall be part of the LED module which is supplied as a light source.
Output color consistency shall be guaranteed and have a Color
Rendering Index (CRI) greater than 80 measured in accordance with
IES LM-79-08, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
B. LEDs shall have an efficacy of 90 lumens per watt as a minimum
measured in accordance with IES LM-79-08, Approved Method:
Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid- State Lighting
Products.
C. The LEDs shall be removable/replaceable by modular means without
any possible risk to maintaining luminaire photometry for future
upgrading/maintenance requirements.
D. Luminaire shall have a measured efficacy of 100 lumen per watt as a
minimum at ambient temperature 45° C, thermal test is to be conducted
to verify the luminaire efficacy.
E. Guaranteed rated life (L70 / L80 as per the specified fixture) shall be
not less than 50,000 hours at specified ambient temperature, and as per
IES LM-80-08, Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of
LED Light Sources.
F. LEDs shall comply with Photo-biological Safety of lamps and lamp
systems in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 62471:2008.
Provide a test report to prove the fixture is classed as “Exempt” or
“Risk Group 1”.
G. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a two-step MacAdam
Ellipse for indoor luminaires and five-step maximum for outdoor
luminaires to ensure color consistency among luminaires.
H. EMI/RFI shall meet BS EN 55015 requirements.
I. The maximum percentage of direct up-light from the outdoor
luminaires shall be as CIE 126-1997.
J. Housing shall incorporate an adequate heat sink, the design of the heat
sinks shall be such that there is a direct thermal path from the led
junctions to the atmosphere thus providing a thermal transfer effect
throughout the life of the luminaire which ensures the overall fittings,
and the LEDs are kept relatively cool.
K. Electronic control gear for LED modules: high efficiency, high power
factor, suitable for operation at the ambient conditions specified for the
project. Control gear shall have constant output current or constant
output voltage over the whole wattage range independent of mains
supply fluctuations as shown on drawings and sufficient for operating

Exterior lighting
the number and wattage of LEDs connected. Guaranteed rated life of
the control gear shall be above 50000 hours.
L. Control gear shall have electrical insulation between primary and
secondary sides.
M. Secondary cables from the control gear to LED modules shall be
provided by the LED supplier. Maximum length between control gear
and LED module shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
N. LED control gear shall be protected against electric shock, accidental
contact with live parts, short circuit, overload, over temperature where
the output current is reduced if the temperature limit is exceeded and
shall be earthed (protection class I).
O. LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function in
order to maintain the light output of the LED by increasing the LED
driving current over the lifetime.
P. Driver(s) shall be UL8750 class 1 or 2 listed for their intended purpose
and shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%.
Q. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC
62384 and shall meet the limits of main harmonic content as defined
in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference suppression
limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC
61547.
1.3 LED DRIVERS TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drivers shall be RoHS Compliant.
B. Drivers shall have a total individual Luminaire Harmonic Distortion
(THD) of ≤ 20% in accordance with ANSI C82.77 (2002). However,
the Contractor shall measure the harmonic at the supply point (L.V side
of the distribution substation) after the installation of all the LED
luminaires and adopt harmonic compensation methods to limit the total
harmonics distortion in the supply voltage to maximum 5% as per
IEEE 519 regulations.
C. The Driver and driver output current shall be fully tested and
compatible with the exact LED chips/engine of the luminaire.
D. Drivers shall have a Power Factor (PF) of L: ≥0.95.
E. Input Voltage; capable of 120–277-volt, single phase.
F. Power can be UL Class 1 or II output or similar European CE or
International equivalent.
G. Drivers shall be IP 21 for Indoor LED lighting luminaires and IP 66
for Outdoor LED lighting luminaires.
H. All drivers shall have protection features (short circuit, overload, and
thermal protection).
I. Electronic control gear for LED modules: high efficiency, high power
factor, suitable for operation at the ambient conditions specified for the
Exterior lighting
project. Control gear shall have constant output current or constant
output voltage over the whole wattage range independent of mains
supply fluctuations as shown on drawings and sufficient for operating
the number and wattage of LEDs connected. Guaranteed rated life of
the control gear shall be above 50000 hours.
J. Control gear shall have electrical insulation between primary and
secondary sides
K. Secondary cables from the control gear to LED modules shall be
provided by the LED supplier. Maximum length between control gear
and LED module shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
L. LED control gear shall be protected against electric shock, accidental
contact with live parts, short circuit, overload, over temperature where
the output current is reduced if the temperature limit is exceeded and
shall be earthed (protection class I).
M. LED driver shall be provided with constant light output function in
order to maintain the light output of the LED by increasing the LED
driving current over the lifetime.
N. Control gear shall comply with IEC 61347-1, IEC 61347-2-13 and IEC
62384 and shall meet the limits of main harmonic content as defined
in IEC 61000-3-2 and comply with radio interference suppression
limits defined in BS EN 55015 and immunity requirements of IEC
61547.
O. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture
shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify
with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and
luminaire.
1.4 LIGHTING COLUMNS
A. Construction: Columns are to be circular section, tapered, formed sheet
steel, electrically welded, and of height specified Columns up to 12-m
height are to be one piece section. Columns above 12 m and up to 20-
m height may be supplied in two-piece sections, of the slip joint type
with sufficient overlap to ensure correct vertical alignment of column
after assembly. Columns are to have minimum wall thickness of 3 mm
at base. Sheet steel is to have minimum rupturing resistance of 37
kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm2.
B. Top of column is to be designed to receive single or double arm bracket
or other arrangement required, supporting number of luminaires shown
on the Drawings. Bracket arrangement is to be designed to ensure that
failure, due to wind induced oscillations, does not occur and that
rotation from desired alignment is not possible.
C. Column Design: Column cross-section, thickness of steel, joints,
welds, bolts etc. are to be designed to withstand gust wind velocity of
Exterior lighting
160 km/hr. blowing in the most unfavorable direction at a height 10 m
above ground level, with column fully equipped.
D. Fatigue of steel is in no case to exceed half elasticity limit, considering
dynamic stresses due to vibrations. Steel flange plate, of adequate
thickness, is to be solidly welded onto lower edge of column and is to
have specified number of holes for holding down bolts together with
central cable access hole not less than 150 mm diameter.
E. earthing stud with washers and nuts is to be welded inside the column.
F. Access door of weatherproof construction is to be positioned at column
base and is to be suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable
terminations and protective device. Door is to be flush fitting with
retaining mechanism and positive locking arrangement with removable
hexagonal key. Column is to be reinforced at door opening. Opposite
each door, a non-hygroscopic baseboard of suitable size to accept
appropriate equipment is to be fixed to inside of column by purpose-
made brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud with washers and nuts is to
be welded inside the column near the access door.
G. Finish: Welds are to be smooth with spatter removed, inside and
outside surfaces of column are to be cleaned by pickling or blasting
and are to be free of grease. Steel components of columns to be hot-
dip galvanized after fabrication.
H. Minimum thickness of zinc coating is to be 500 g/m2 on both inside
and outside surfaces of column. Galvanizing is to be to NFA 91/121 or
BS EN ISO 1461.
I. Any damage to galvanizing is to be rectified during erection by wire
brushing affected area and treating with approved rust converter to the
satisfaction of Engineer. Flange plate and inside and outside of column
base are to be coated with heavy bitumen paint prior to erection.
J. Protection and Wiring: Columns with one or two luminaires are to be
connected over one phase and neutral. Columns with three or more
luminaires are to be connected over 3 phases and neutral, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. Bolted terminals and cable lugs are
to be provided with 3 phases and neutral terminals, for incoming and
outgoing 3 phase 4-wire cable, and of the sizes shown on Drawings.
One circuit breaker, single pole 6 A is to be provided for each phase
leading to a luminaire. Circuit breakers are to be compensated and
rated for 50 deg. C ambient with interrupting capacity of at least 9 kA,
and are to be mounted in weatherproof enclosure at baseboard. Wiring
is to be PVC insulated 3 core or 4 core 85-deg. C conductor
temperature. Cable is to be at least 4 mm2 copper conductor.

Exterior lighting
1.5 SMART POLE:
For smart pole refer to relevant sections in technology department.

1.6 STREET LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Lighting control system for smart poles: shall be a state-of-the art,

modular and scalable computer addressable lighting management
system providing total flexibility of control through addressable
control and monitoring of each pole mounted luminaire. The system
main levels / components are:
a. DALI Driver:
 which is equipped within the luminaire body; all relevant
specifications are detailed within the luminaire specifications.
b. DALI Gateway / Controller:
 shall be installed inside the cabinet complete with the required
power supply and RJ45 Ethernet port, and it will support accessing
to all system parameters via application software and web
interface.
 Modular DIN rail type, supporting 64 addresses per each DALI
channel and expendable up to 4 DALI channels with 256
addresses, the loading of the channels shall permit 10% spare
capacity. It shall be provided with short circuit, overload, and surge
protective devices.
 The DALI cable size shall be 2x1.5 mm2 and the maximum length
within the DALI channel shall not exceed 280 m including the
vertical runs within the pole, in case this length shall be exceeded,
then DALI extender to be used.
 The maximum withstands ambient temperature 55 °C, subject to
verification by carrying out actual measures in site to report the
maximum ambient temperature inside the pole. The permissible
humidity to be up to 95%.
c. Main Controller
 The main controller shall be located at the COC building. And it
shall be used to facilitate and manage the communication signals
between main workstation and the distributed DALI gateways /
controllers.
d. PC central Controller
 For central Controller refer to relevant sections in technology
department.

Exterior lighting
1.7 UNDERWATER LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
A. Type: Waterproof and corrosion free fixtures, IP 68 to IEC 60529,
suitably designed for continuous emersion under water under the
specified depth. Under water lights shall comply with IEC 60598-1 and
IEC 60598-2-18.
B. Underwater lighting luminaires shall be Class III for protection against
electric shock.
C. Underwater lighting luminaires shall be provided with non-detachable
flexible cable or cord with appropriate length.
D. Non-detachable cords / cable shall be suitable for total continuous
immersion and equivalent in properties to type H07RN8-F and of
suitable length to reach the fixture’s transformer or control gear, as
specified.
1.8 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
A. Obstruction lights shall be provided in accordance the latest editions of
ICAO Annex 14, FAA AC 150/5345-43, FAA Engineering Brief No.
67, and Egyptian Civil Aviation Regulations.
B. Obstruction lights shall provide the ICAO photometric performances
for use as low-intensity, medium-intensity, and high-intensity, as
shown on drawings. They shall also comply with FAA specification.
C. Obstruction lights shall be provided with LED lamps. The lamps shall
be suitable for locations where vibrations are experienced. They shall
be rated for 220 V and procured from reputed internationally
recognized manufacturers and shall have a certified lamp life of at least
50,000 burning hours at full intensity, and subject to the project
environmental conditions and to provide a long-life fitting. The
obstruction lights shall use LEDs as a light source, with a manufacturer
guarantee of 5 years.
D. The power supply boards of the obstruction lights shall include surge
protection devices in accordance with FAA EB-67.
E. The lamp failure shall be monitored by a relay and audio-visual alarm
annunciated at a local control panel and at a remote location through
interface with BMS, where duly authorized technical/maintenance
personnel are alerted to the alarm condition.
F. The transfer from Day to Night operation of High and High and
Medium Intensity lights shall be monitored via BMS, as per BMS
Schedules included in the mechanical drawings.
G. The automatic activation and Day/Night Operation of the high,
medium, and low intensity obstruction lights shall be via connection
with photocell installed on building roof. Obstruction Lights shall be
equipped with all necessary relays / contacts for interface with both

Exterior lighting
BMS and photocell with remote override switch to enable to manual
override operation.
H. Alarm cabling shall be provided with protected containment to avoid
damage.
I. Joints are not permitted in the power supply cabling to the aviation
obstruction warning lights.
J. All junction boxes/control panels/controller boxes used shall be
metallic and rated IP 65. The controller/relay unit enclosures shall be
provided with corrosion treatment and powder coated paint finish
K. Obstruction light system shall be suitable for 220Va.c. operation at
specified ambient conditions.
L. Obstruction light fixtures shall be metallic body with heat tempered
glass cover.
M. The photometric of the lighting fixtures shall be tested and certified by
an internationally approved, independent testing laboratory.
N. Obstruction lights shall be provided with internal components such as
connection terminal blocks, gaskets, lamp hole all internal wiring shall
be of stranded copper, double insulated, (105 0 C) heat resistant type.
which are not degraded by heat / U.V. Radiation / humidity, such as
plastic, PVC, GRP, etc. all internal wiring shall be of stranded copper,
double insulated, (105 0 C) heat resistant type, all internal wiring shall
be of stranded copper, double insulated, (105 0 C) heat resistant type.
O. Obstruction light covers shall be provided with a non-degradable chain
connection to the body of the luminaire to avoid damage during repair,
maintenance, etc. and the glass dome covers/lenses shall be screw-on
type.
P. All screws and bolts shall be provided with self-holding clips, to
prevent loss of screw/bolt after opening.
Q. Obstruction light fixtures may be provided with external paint finish.
If provided, dark colors are not to be used and the paint material shall
be certified for UV radiation withstand.
R. All fixing hardware shall be stainless steel.
S. Mounting of obstruction lights shall be designed for fixing to top of
one conduit, 1 inch diameter, or by means of a bracket.
T. All Obstruction lights and system shall be to specific approval of the
Egyptian Civil Aviation Authority.

Exterior lighting
M. PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
sections.
B. Preliminary design completes with PV calculations, layout plans showing
PV panels distribution, power SLD, monitoring and control riser diagrams
shall be included at pre-contract technical submittals.
C. The contractor is responsible to achieve the maximum possible power
output from the dedicated area through engineered based design on the
final equipment selection. The system design, components sizing and
protection scheme with system average performance ratio not less than
80% in the preliminary design and the final detail design stages
D. The PV Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical Engineering
design, supply, installation, commissioning and testing.
E. The contractor must approve the final detail design from local authority
(Administrative Capital for Urban Development ACUD)
F. Detailed energy yield performance simulation results, using suitable
software (such as PVSYST, PVsol…etc.), indicating all types of
anticipated losses and taking into consideration the site characteristics and
the final equipment selection.
G. Detailed shading analysis taking into consideration the exact locations,
orientation, and actual heights of PV arrays, in addition to any nearby
structures/objects that may cause shading on the PV arrays.
H. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit certified test reports showing
compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical
properties of system components. All tests shall be witnessed by ACUD.
I. Fabrication, procurement, supplying and installing the complete
photovoltaic system including the PV modules, all electrical components
necessary required equipment such as the conduits and cabling and all the
accessory work including PV system earthing and bonding.
J. Connection to City Operation Center (COC) and SCADA/BMS system,
including interface elements such as relays, transducers, etc. as detailed in
SCADA/BMS schedules and /or shown on the Drawings.
K. PV Mounting system including necessary structural calculation, shop
drawings,
L. Providing maintenance guide, training of support staff of the PV -plant.

PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM
1.1 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
 Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes for PV panels.
 Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Compliance Sheet: Submit point-wise compliance sheet with the
project specifications item by item, duly signed by the manufacturer /
manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special materials and
workmanship warranty and minimum power output warranty.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include in operation and
maintenance manuals in compliance with the approved manufacturer’s
instructions and to the satisfaction of the Employer’s requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.2.1 Qualifications:
A. Manufacturer:
 Having minimum of 5 years engaged in the manufacture of photo
voltaic and solar power products, of types, and ratings required,
and ancillary materials, including (PV modules, inverters, DC
cables, monitoring, DC component, AC component, etc.) similar
to or exceeding the Project’s requirements.
 Capable of providing field service representation during
construction.
 Manufacturing facility certified to ISO 9001 and to ISO 14001.
B. Installer:
 Experienced installer with 4 years minimum experience in PV
installations, and successful completion of at least one grid-
connected PV system with capacity similar to or exceeding the
project requirements, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
 Installer shall be certified by NREA and enrolled with IMC as a
qualified contractor for grid-connected PV systems with
capacities similar to or exceeding the project requirements.
1.2.2 Local Representative:
A. Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer(s) has a
locally established and authorized organization which can be called

upon for professional advice and maintenance as may be required, and
which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to day and
emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy Engineer
may disqualify a manufacturer.
B. Service Center: PV system manufacturer(s) maintains a local service
center, capable of providing training, parts, and emergency
maintenance and repairs at the Project site.
1.2.3 Mock-Up:
Construct mock-up for project above 500 KWp as follows:
A. Purpose: Construct a complete set of PV arrays with their relevant
Inverter as an independent part of the system, including relevant PV
modules, mounting structures, cabling, raceways, earthing, combiner
box(es) if required, inverter and related system components and
accessories, to judge the quality of work and the choice of equipment,
wiring methods, modules fixation parts and mounting structures,
materials, and related accessories, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Dimensions and Process: Construct the required dimensions as
directed by the Engineer, using proposed procedures, colors, textures,
finishes and quality of work.
C. Locate where directed by the Engineer, to be within the assigned area
for PV system installation on Roof as shown on drawings.
D. Do not proceed with work prior to receipt of written acceptance of
mock-up.
E. When accepted, mock-up shall demonstrate the minimum standard of
quality required for this work.
F. Approved mock-up shall remain part of finished work, as directed by
the Engineer.
G. Capacity: from 5 to 10 percent of project peak power (KWp).
1.2.4 Standards:
A. Comply with the following Codes, Regulations and Standards:
 ACUD specifications section “Rooftop Photovoltaic System” that
specifies the minimum requirements for PV system
 ACUD Smart City Guidelines
 Egypt ERA Regulations “Technical Requirements for Connecting
Small Scale PV Systems to Low Voltage Distribution Networks”
 Egyptian Grid Code
 Local Codes, Regulations and Authorities requirements
 IEC 61215 - Crystalline silicon terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules
— Design qualification and type approval
 IEC 61683 - Photovoltaic systems – Power conditioners - Procedure
for measuring efficiency
 IEC 61730 - Requirements for construction, testing and safety
qualification
 IEC 61829 - Crystalline silicon photovoltaic (PV) array – On-site
measurement of I-V characteristics
 IEC 60332 Tests on electric and optical fiber cables under the
conditions
 NEMA AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case
Switches.
 ASTM E1036 Standard Test Methods for electrical Performance of
nonconcentrated Terrestrial Photovoltaic Modules and Arrays Using
Reference Cells.
 NFPA 70 National Electrical Codes
 EN 50380 - Datasheet and nameplate information for PV modules.
 IEC 61727 - Photovoltaic (PV) systems - Characteristics of the utility
interface
 IEC 62116 - Utility-Interconnected PV Inverters – Test procedure of
Islanding Prevention measures
 IEC 60364-7-712 - Low voltage electrical installations - Part 7-712:
Requirements for special installations or locations - Solar
photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems
 IEC 61643-32:2017 – Low voltage surge protective devices. Surge
protective devices connected to the DC side of photovoltaic
installations. Selection and application principles
 IEC TS 62804-1: Photovoltaic (PV) modules-Test methods for the
detection of potential-induced degradation - Part 1: Crystalline
silicon.
 IEC 61730 – Parts 1and2: PV module Safety Qualification.
 IEC 62109- Parts 1and2 - Safety of power converters for use in PV
power systems.
 IEC 62446: Grid connected photovoltaic systems – Minimum
requirements for system documentation, commissioning tests and
inspection
 IEC 61853-1 - PV module performance testing and energy rating.
 IEC 62548 - PV Arrays design requirements.
 IEC 61724 – PV System Performance Monitoring Guidelines for
measurement, data exchange and analysis.
 IEC 60068-2-68: Environmental testing - Part 2-68: Tests - Test L:
Dust and sand.
 BS 7430 - Code of Practice for Protective Earthing of Electrical
Installations.
 Electrical systems shall conform to the latest edition of BS 7671 -
"Requirements for Electrical Installations - IET Wiring Regulations",
where not in contradiction with Local Regulations.
 IEC 60898-2 Circuit breakers for the overcurrent protection for
household and similar installations- Part 2: Circuit-breakers for AC
and DC operation.
 EN 50618 - Electric Cables for PV systems
 IEC 62305 – Protection Against Lightning.
 IEC 61000 – Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
B. PV installation shall comply with IEC 60364 general requirements
along with the requirements related to PV installations as listed in IEC
60364-7-712, IEC 62548, and IEC TS 62738.
C. Products shall be sourced either directly from manufacturer, or from
authorized agent/representative.
2. PRODUCTS:
2.1 SUMMARY:
This Section includes the following:
A. PV Modules and Distribution system.
B. PV array frame.
C. PV Mounting structures.
D. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes
E. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes
F. Utility Interactive Inverters.
G. AC cables and raceways
H. PV monitoring and control system.
I. AC and DC Earthing Systems.
J. Other system ancillaries and auxiliaries.
K. Necessary interface modules and accessories for communication with
the SCADA/BMS/COC system.

L. Other equipment components that are not specifically mentioned in
this specification or in the drawings but are required for the proper
functioning of the system as intended, are deemed to be included.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. The complete PV system shall be monitored and controlled via a
centralized PV monitoring and control system. The PV monitoring and
control system shall be connected to SCADA/BMS and to ACUD-
COC as per ACUD requirements The PV system shall be designed for
a minimum of 25 years continuous performance of its intended
function under normal operating conditions based on regular scheduled
maintenance being performed and taking into consideration the local
environmental and site conditions including but not limited to the
altitude, temperature, solar irradiance, humidity, wind, dust, sand
storms, precipitation, pollution, soil conditions and grid conditions and
achieving average performance ratio of at least 70%.
B. The system is to be On-Grid PV System with nominal power shown on
drawings and connected to the low voltage network via Smart Metering
Scheme as shown on drawings.
C. The system must be equipped with smart metering system connected
to COC described as required by ACUD.
D. PV system shall immediately disconnect from the grid upon loss of
grid power.
E. PV arrays shall be installed within the assigned areas on top of the Roof
or as shown on drawings. PV mounting structures shall be installed
above, and fixed to, the main metal structures on Roof as shown on
drawings. Inverters shall be installed outdoors in shaded locations
under the PV arrays. Inverters shall be fixed to the metal posts/columns
installed above the Roof and shall be installed at high level as shown
on drawings.
F. PV inverters shall be connected to dedicated outdoor distribution
boards located in a shaded area near the PV arrays as possible. The
distribution boards shall be connected to dedicated circuit breakers in
main LV panel (MDB) at the relevant substation through the smart
meter as shown on drawings.
G. PV system components shall withstand the worst environmental site
conditions in terms of ambient temperature, temperature variations,
solar irradiation, dust, pollution, seismic loads, humidity, salinity, wind

load, snow load, rain, hail diameter and speed. Contractor shall submit
certified environmental conditions substantiating the adopted figures.
2.3 PV MODULES:
A. Monocrystalline silicon can operate without any derating from (40°C
to +85°C) operating temperature, with minimum efficiency of 20.7 at
STC.
B. Temperature coefficient does not exceed (-0.37%) of nominal power
per each 1°C increase in temperature -Module should be tested in
accordance with IEC TS 62804-1 free of potential induced degradation
(PID) and tested in accordance with IEC 62804-1.
C. Application class: A, Safety class: II in accordance with IEC 61730,
Junction box: IP-65.
D. Number of bypass diodes shall be 3 as a minimum.
E. The PV modules shall be resistant to abrasion, hail impact, rain, water
and environmental pollution, anti-soiling coating which shall be
factory-applied and shall have lifetime not less than the lifetime of PV
modules. and shall be provided with anti-reflection coating and back
surface field (BSF) structure to increase con-version efficiency.
F. PV modules shall be Complying also with IEC 61215, IEC 61721, BS
EN 50380, IEC 60068-2-68, IEC 61701, IEC 62716 contractor shall
submit necessary test certificates.
G. Modules shall have minimum maintenance requirements, high
reliability, have minimum of 25-year design life, and be designed for
normal and unattended operation
H. The front cover of PV modules shall be made of high strength tempered
glass with thickness not less than 3.2mm. Mechanical strength of the
modules shall be tested for 2400 Pa wind load to IEC 61215 as a
minimum.
I. PV modules shall be Fire Class (C) as a minimum, tested in accordance
with IEC 61730.
J. PV modules shall be constructed such that the photovoltaic cells are
half-cut and internally connected into two independent current paths
per module to ensure optimum resistance to shading when installed in
portrait position, such that shading on the lower/upper half of the
module shall not affect the energy production from the other half.
K. PV modules overall dimensions shall be as shown on drawings, unless
otherwise proposed by the contractor and approved by the Engineer.

L. PV modules shall be suitable for operation at system voltage up to
1000V DC as a minimum.
M. PV modules shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with junction
boxes, bypass diodes, output cables and connectors.
N. The module frame shall be made of Anodized Aluminum alloy, or
equivalent corrosion resistant material electrically compatible with the
structural material used for mounting the modules.
O. PV modules back sheet shall be made of highly durable material,
suitable for harsh environments, high humidity, UV exposure and high
salinity conditions.
P. Encapsulation: The encapsulant shall fill all spaces inside the module
and shall adhere to the front glass and the back sheet. The encapsulant
material shall be stable at elevated temperature and high UV exposure,
of high light transmittance, resistant to moisture and shall be resistant
to potential induced degradation (PID).
Q. PV connectors shall be complying with EN 50521, tool locking types
(such as MC4, Tyco, Amphenol or approved equal) Connectors
installed outdoor shall be enclosed by a material complying with the
following requirements: UV resistant to IEC 60731-1, IP55 degree of
protection to IEC 60529, pass the steel ball impact test to IEC 605125-
1 and IEC 60512-5-2 and meet the requirements of accessibility test to
IEC 61730-2. For connectors including grounding members, the
grounding member shall be the first to make and the last to break
contact. Connectors that can be separated without the use of a tool shall
not have accessible conductive parts.
R. Junction boxes shall comply with EN 50548 and shall have an IP 67
degree of protection to IEC 60529 as a minimum. Junction boxes shall
be completely watertight and resistant to temperature and UV
radiation. Junction boxes shall contain both the positive and negative
output terminals. The junction boxes shall contain a small replaceable
cover for easy access for replacement of the bypass diodes. The
junction boxes shall be completely filled with a soft, clear, removable,
self-healing, room temperature cure, dielectric potting gel leaving no
air gaps.
S. PV modules in the entire system shall be procured from the same
manufacturer and shall be of the same model number with identical
specifications in terms of nominal power rating, nominal I-V
characteristics and coefficients.

T. PV arrays shall be accessible for inspection, maintenance, or repairs
without necessitating the dismantling of structural parts, mounting
frames, raceways etc.
2.4 DC CABLES
A. PV Cables shall be, double insulated, flexible, water/moisture resistant,
sunlight resistant (UV resistant), flame retardant to IEC 60332-1-2,
Anti – rodents and suitable for outdoor use and shall be listed and
labeled as ‘photovoltaic wires/cables’ as per IEC62930 and EN 50618.
B. DC cables shall comply with EN 50618 or approved equal.
C. PV external cables are to be flexible (multi-stranded) copper to allow
for thermal/wind movement of array/modules.
D. Cables and wires used for the interconnection of PV modules shall be
provided with specified solar PV connectors and couplers
E. All cables and conduit pipes shall be clamped to structure with thermo-
plastic clamps
F. DC cables shall be suitable for continuous operation at conductor
temperature of 90oC and maximum conductor temperature of 120oC.
G. DC Cables shall be rated 1.5 KV (DC) as a minimum and tested for
6.5kV (AC) or 15KV (DC) in accordance with EN 50395.
H. Minimum cross section of 4 mm2, subject to approval by the Engineer
based on the final voltage drop calculations of the complete PV system.
I. The minimum current rating for cables shall meet the requirement of
IEC 62548 and IEC 60364-7-712 taking into consideration the
applicable derating factors.
J. Voltage-drop in DC cables, from PV modules up to the inverter, shall
not exceed 1% Vmpp at STC.
K. Proper segregation shall be provided between DC and AC cables.
L. Cables shall be properly supported and protected against wind effects,
sharp edges, and sharp bending radii along with all proper installation
conditions, such that the cables lifetime shall not be affected.
M. DC cables shall be installed in earthed EMT conduits or covered
weatherproof raceways cable trunk as applicable and shall not be
exposed to direct sunlight. Cables of positive and negative polarities
shall be segregated in separate conduits.
2.5 DC COMBINER AND MONITORING BOXES
A. DC Combiner and Monitoring boxes shall comply with the following
Standards:
 IEC 61439-1
 IEC 61439-2
 IEC 62548
 IEC 60364-7-712
B. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall be suitable for system
voltage up to 1000V DC as a minimum.
C. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall have class II insulation.
D. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall be suitable and derated for
outdoor installations in the site worst ambient conditions as specified
in Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
E. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall have IP 65 degree of
protection as a minimum, IK10 or 2mm enclosure thickness, UV
resistant.
F. The DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall comply with IEC
61000-6-1 and IEC 61000-6-3 for immunity and emission of EMC.
G. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall meet following as a
minimum:
 Main load-break switch disconnector (as required).
 Disconnection device for each string (or sub-array) and shall be
withdrawable PV fuses to IEC 60269-6 (or PV circuit breakers to IEC
60947-2 or load-break switch) they also provide over current
protection to protect both polarities of each string.
 Surge Protective Devices (SPDs).
 Series Arc Fault detectors, complying with UL1699B or IEC 63027.
 Reverse current protection (via blocking anti-return diodes), for each
string (or sub-array). The type of blocking diodes shall be Schottky
diodes with voltage drop not exceeding 0.4V at maximum array
current. Proper ventilation shall be provided for the blocking diodes in
order to avoid overheating.
 Monitoring and control module to remotely monitor the following as a
minimum:
 String DC input currents and array voltages with an error tolerance less
than ±1%.
 Overcurrent and Overvoltage status.
 Status of main switch disconnector.
 Ambient parameters and Internal temperature inside the DC combiner
box.
 Surge Protection Status.

 RS485 Communications protocol or equivalent, as per manufacturer
recommendations.
 DC contactors to control both polarities of each string.
H. DC Combiner and Monitoring boxes shall be in adjacent to the relevant
PV arrays as applicable.
I. DC Combiner and Monitoring boxes shall be accessible for inspection,
maintenance, or repairs without necessitating the dismantling of
structural parts, PV mounting structures, raceways, or the like.
J. DC Combiner and Monitoring Boxes shall be suitable for mounting as
floor standing on support or as fixed to wall.
K. DC protection and/or switching devices shall effectively isolate both
the positive and negative terminals of the PV arrays.
L. DC Combiner and Monitoring boxes shall be self-powered or provided
with external power supply. In case DC combiner boxes with external
power supply are used, the contractor shall provide the necessary
power supply from the nearest service panelboard fed from UPS
supply, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
M. The devices / functions of DC combiner and monitoring boxes might
be integrated into the PV string inverters, subject to the Engineer’s
approval based on the final equipment selection.
2.6 INVERTERS
A. Three phase string inverters shall be utilized to invert DC power from
PV modules into AC power for interconnection to the Grid. The
inverter shall have a wide input voltage range up to 1000V DC and
their AC output shall be compatible with the local grid at three phases
rated at 400V, 50Hz with THD < 3% and 95% efficiency.
B. Output characteristics:
 Nominal AC voltage: 400V.
 AC voltage range: +/- 10%.
 AC grid frequency: 50 Hz.
 AC grid frequency range: +/- 10%.
 Power factor output at rated power: 1.
 Displacement power factor adjustable: 0.8 overexcited to 0.8 under-
excited.
C. Inverters shall be provided with the following minimum Protective and
communication Measures along with any additional grid management
functions required:
a. Protective Functions:
 DC Reverse Polarity protection for each DC input.
 AC Overcurrent and short circuit protection.
 PV power reduction
 AC over/under voltage.
 AC over/under frequency.
 AC and DC over-current protection.
 surge protection on DC and AC
 DC over/under voltage.
 Ground-fault protection.
 String failure detection.
 Anti-islanding and grid monitoring functions, in compliance with
Egypt ERA regulations and IEC 62116.
 Surge protection on both input and output.
 Array earth insulation resistance monitoring device/function.
 Residual current monitoring device/function.
 Fault ride through for temporary voltage drops.
b. Data Communication:
 Operational status indication. 2.Array DC power.
 DC voltage.
 DC current.
 Generated Energy.
 Grid Voltage.
 Grid Frequency.
 Generated System Voltage (AC).
 Generated System Frequency (AC).
 Earth fault.
 Inverter unit failure indication.
c. Communication features:
 RS485 Communications protocol or equivalent, as per
manufacturer recommendations.
 LCD display screen to display system parameters and most
important inverter and grid related parameters like PV array power,
AC grid power, PV array current.
 Web based monitoring and Sub-array monitoring feature.
d. Inverters shall be air cooled as per manufacturer’s
recommendations. Inverters shall be provided with an enclosure
ensuring that the minimum degree of protection to IEC 60529 is
IP65, UV resistant, IK10 for outdoor installations.
 Regulatory Approvals: Egypt ERA regulations
 Egyptian Grid Code
 ACUD regulations
 IEC 62109
 IEC 62093
 IEC 61727
 IEC 62116
 EN 50530
 IEC 61000
 IEC 62477
 Local codes, regulations, and Authorities requirements
e. The Inverter shall be provided with at least dual MPP Trackers with
a wide voltage range, with all necessary protection and
communication functions / devices such as residual cur-rent
monitoring device/function and Communication interface with the
PV monitoring and control system.
f. Reactive power management and dynamic grid support, with
adjustable output power factor to meet the local authorities’
requirements.
g. Inverter shall be provided with integrated wiring box avoiding the
use of external DC combiner box. Wiring box shall contain
removable string fuses as disconnection means to isolate individual
strings. Inverters must automatically reset and resume normal
operation after a power limiting operation.
h. The inverter shall be capable of continuous operation into a system
with voltage variation of ± 10% of nominal voltage.
i. Inverters output shall have nominal AC power quality,
characteristics and operation ranges conforming to local Grid
standards and complying with Egypt ERA regulations “Technical
Requirements for Connecting Small Scale PV (ssPV) Systems to
Low Voltage Distribution Networks”.
j. Contractor shall provide the necessary interface protection at the
point of common coupling to comply with the local authorities’
requirements.
k. Inverters shall be suitable for outdoor installations and de-rated at
the site worst ambient conditions.
l. Inverters shall have protection class I to IEC 62477-1 and
overvoltage category III to IEC 60664-1.

2.7 PV MOUNTING STRUCTURES
A. Type: Fixed tilt angle,
B. PV mounting structures shall be made of Anodized Aluminum alloy or
galvanized steel in accordance with ISO 1461.
C. Mounting structures shall be complete with array frames, channels,
beams, supports, angles, screws, nuts, washers, bolts, fasteners,
fixation clamps, covered raceways or integrated U channels to run PV
string cables, etc. and all necessary accessories for a complete
installation.
D. Screws, nuts, washers, bolts, fasteners, and fixation clamps shall be
made of stainless steel.
E. Mounting structures thickness, joints, welds, screws, bolts, fixation
clamps, accessories, etc. shall be designed to withstand gust wind
velocity blowing in the most unfavorable direction
F. Contractor shall submit certified wind tunnel test report, performed by
an independent testing laboratory at wind speed (180 km/hr.), to the
Engineer’s approval.
G. Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of modules mounting
structures and it shall withstand the worst environmental conditions in
terms of ambient temperature, solar irradiation, dust, pollution, seis-
H. mic loads, humidity, salinity, wind load, snow load, rain, hail diameter
and speed.
I. Contractor shall ensure compliance with all applicable national
construction standards and to submit structural calculations to the
Engineer prior to manufacturing of any fixation parts or support
structures.
J. Mounting structure design shall comply with the PV modules
manufacturer’s recommendations for proper installation of PV
modules in the orientation and arrangement shown on drawings. The
Contractor is responsible for coordination between both suppliers.
2.8 AC CABLES AND RACEWAYS
A. AC cables shall comply with relevant sections of the specifications and
shall be installed in earthed EMT conduits and/or directly buried in
ground as applicable.
B. Conduits / raceways and all other components on the AC side of PV
system shall comply with relevant sections of the specifications.

2.9 PV MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. PV monitoring and control system shall be provided for project above
500 KWp in compliance with IEC 61724 and shall meet all
requirements listed herein, subject to the Engineer’s approval.
B. PV monitoring and control system shall include the following as a
minimum:
 Environmental sensors.
 Modules’ temperature sensors.
 Current transducers.
 Data loggers.
 Interface with inverters, SCADA/BMS and KWh meters.
 Cabling, software, workstation, gateways, interface equipment,
accessories ...etc.
 Module-level performance monitoring.
 Fault detection and automatic alerts.
 Communication interface shall be an integral part of monitoring
system and shall be suitable to be connected to COC.
 All necessary devices to achieve the required functions.
C. The system shall be a remote, real-time monitoring system capable of
recording and transmitting real time and historical PV performance
data.
D. The system should be provided with two local workstations at each of
the two SCADA/BMS rooms in the project as shown on drawings.
E. The monitoring and control system shall achieve the following:
 Control the plant parameters.
 Monitor and verify the energy generation and performance of each
section of the plant against the design expected performance.
 Enable system configuration, diagnostic and reporting status.
 Initiate alarms in case of any equipment failure, fault and / or under
performance.
 The system shall provide real time displays.
F. The system shall control the following parameters as a minimum:
 Inverter’s operation.
 Active/Reactive Power management.
 System parameters and modes of operation.
G. The system shall provide real time measurements for all parameters
specified in IEC 61724 including but not limited to the following:
a. Meteorology:
 Total irradiance in the plane of the array.
 Ambient air temperature.
 Wind speed.
b. Photovoltaic arrays:
 Output voltage.
 Output current. iii. Output power.
 Module temperature.
c. Utility grid:
 Utility voltage
 Current to utility grid
 Current from utility grid iv. Power to utility grid
 v. Power from utility grid
d. Inverters:
 DC current and voltage at each MPPT input to the inverter.
 Frequency at the inverter output.
 Voltage and current at inverter output.
 Active power at the inverter output.
 Reactive power at the inverter output.
 Accumulated active energy yield.
 Power Factor.
 Internal temperature.
 Inverter status
e. DC Combiner Boxes:
 DC current and voltage on each string and sub-array which are
connected to DC combiner boxes.
 Internal temperature.
f. Injected active and reactive energy.
g. Consumed active and reactive energy.
h. Number of operating hours.
H. The system shall be able to obtain the following status / alarms:
 Overcurrent status in DC combiner boxes.
 Overvoltage status in DC combiner boxes.
 Status of main disconnecting switch in DC combiner boxes.
 Overcurrent status in inverters.
 Overvoltage status at inverters input and output sides.
 Status of disconnecting switches at inverters DC side.
 Status of disconnecting switches (or circuit breakers) at inverters AC
side.
 Faults, alarms, and warnings.
I. The system shall have the following functionalities as a minimum:
 Remote access for web-based inverters monitoring.
 Analysis and calculation of the Performance Ratio, energy yield and
availability on both long term and short-term basis.
 Real-time monitoring of the plant output and comparison against the
anticipated performance or historical data.
 Analysis and detection of equipment underperformance via
comparison against historical data or similar equipment within the
plant.
 Remote notification to the operator in case of faults (via Email, SMS
or similar).
J. The system shall be provided with a meteorological station suitably
located within the Roof area; the meteorological station shall comprise
the following components as a minimum:
 Two secondaries standard pyranometers installed in the plane of array
with an error tolerance less than ±2%.
 Sufficient number of PV module temperature sensors (PT1000)
installed at various locations which shall be representative of the array
conditions. Such sensors shall be auto adhesive type and located at the
back surface of the modules. Module locations shall be determined as
per method A in IEC 61829. The PT sensors error tolerance shall be
less than ±1°C.
 One ambient temperature sensor in ventilated radiation shield to
measure ambient temperature with an error tolerance less than ±1°C.
 Two reference cells installed at the plane of array with an error
tolerance less than ±2%.
 One cup anemometer to measure wind speed with an error tolerance
less than ±2%.
K. The meteorological station shall continuously transmit (at adjustable
rate down to 1 second) the below parameters to the PV monitoring and
control system as a minimum:
 Irradiance data from all installed pyranometers and reference cells.
 Module’s temperature.
 Ambient temperature.
 Wind speed.
L. All sensors shall have valid calibration certificates and shall be
submitted to the Employer.
M. The PV monitoring and control system shall be compatible with the
PV system components. The inverters manufacturer and PV
monitoring and control system manufacturer shall confirm
compatibility among various system components.
N. The communication network shall support TCP/IP and other open
protocols.
O. PV monitoring and control system software shall be interfaced and
fully compatible with SCADA/BMS.
P. PV monitoring and control system shall be interfaced with ACUD-
COC through smart and security network (SSN) as per ACUD
requirements.
Q. PV monitoring and control system shall be connected to local
workstation at each of the two SCADA/BMS rooms in the project as
shown on drawings.
R. Contractor shall provide all necessary gateways, cabling, and interface
equipment for a fully functional system.
S. The system supplier shall provide 24/7 technical support.
T. The sampling interval shall not exceed 1 minute for parameters which
vary directly with irradiance and shall be in the range of 1-10 minutes
otherwise.
U. A monitoring log shall be kept for all unusual events, component
changes, failures, faults, or accidents. Also, other comments which
would be useful in interpreting and evaluating the data shall also be
noted.
V. All system maintenance events shall be explicitly documented.
2.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Provide a complete earthing system for the steel structures of Roof
and PV system components and relevant AC network components,
complete with earthing bars, conductors, bonding, test links, earth
electrodes, earth lattices, earth pits and all related accessories and
necessary works for a complete installation, complying with BS
7430, IEC 60364-7712, IEC TS 62738, IEC 62548, and IEC 60364
covering the following as a minimum:
 PV modules
 PV mounting structures
 Inverters
 Surge protective devices (SPDs)
 Signal and communication systems
 Raceways, metallic conduits ...etc.
 Steel structures of the Roof
B. Stainless steel (or bi-metal) earthing connections shall be used for
earthing of Aluminum PV module frames.
2.11 PROTECTION AGAINST LIGHTNING and OVERVOLTAGE
A. The complete PV system shall be protected against direct and indirect
lightning strikes and over-voltages in accordance with the following
standards:
 IEC 62305
 IEC 60364-7-712
 IEC TS 62738
 IEC 62548
 IEC 61643-32
 IEC 61643-12
 IEC 60364-4-44
B. Surge protective devices (SPDs) shall be provided as per the
Standards. SPDs shall comply with the following standards:
 IEC 61643-31 for SPDs installed on DC side of the PV system
 IEC 61643-11 for SPDs installed on AC side of the PV system
 IEC 61643-21 for SPDs installed to protect the communication
systems
C. SPDs shall be provided with overcurrent protection (fused switches
or circuit breakers) as per manufacturer recommendations.
D. SPDs shall be coordinated in compliance with IEC 61643-12 and as
per the equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
2.12 OPERATIONS and MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. The contractor shall provide the Employer with a comprehensive
Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual for the PV system,
including the documentation requirements listed in IEC 62446-1 in
addition to the following as the minimum requirements:
 Operating instructions detailing all normal start up, operating,
emergency and planned shutdown procedures along with any
precautions recommended to prevent Plant deterioration during
periods of nonoperation.
 Manufacturer(s) instruction books, leaflets and drawings for
installation, maintenance, operation, erection, dismantling,

reassembly and testing of all equipment, including complete
information for ordering spare parts and performing repairs.
 Routine/preventative maintenance schedules.
 Cleaning procedures and schedules.
 Schematic diagrams and general arrangement drawings of as-
installed control systems.
 Datasheets for all installed system components.
 Warranty documentation for all system components – to include
starting date of warranty, period of warranty in addition to warranty
conditions.
 Copies of all testing, commissioning and verification reports shall be
added to the operation and maintenance (O&M) manual before the
issue of Taking-Over Certificate.
2.13 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of PV modules and components
with roof skin and other construction and electrical work, including
conduit, piping, equipment, adjacent surfaces, raceways, electrical
boxes and fittings, and cabling/wiring work.
B. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for
equipment access
C. and avoid crossing with wet services.
D. Coordinate the installation of the complete PV system with other
trades, including but not limited to:
 Required power and data outlets for PV system components
(including PV monitoring and control system, DC combiner boxes .
...etc.).
 Required earth bars, test links, etc. for PV system earthing.
 Communication and necessary interface between the PV monitoring
and control system and the SCADA/BMS, KWh meters and ACUD-
COC in compliance with ACUD requirements.
 Coordinate the interface protection at point of common coupling
(PCC) as per the authorities’ requirements.
 Coordinate size, location and fixation details of PV mounting
structures with the building structures.
E. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for
equipment access and avoid crossings with wet services.
F. Contractor is fully responsible for coordination with all relevant
Authorities and to obtain the necessary approvals and permits for PV
system installation and connection to the low voltage network via Net
Metering scheme as per local codes, regulations and in full
compliance with the Authorities requirements.
2.14 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
A. Equipment is to be designed and derated for continuous and trouble-
free service under the following climatic conditions of Cairo:
 Altitude: Coastal Sea level.
 Maximum ambient temperature: 45 deg. C.
 Minimum ambient temperature: 3 deg. C.
 Maximum relative humidity: 90 percent.
 Atmospheric conditions: Sandy, heavy condensation air blown
salinity, and sandstorms also prevail.
B. Equipment, apparatus, material accessories outdoors is to be
corrosion and salinity proof. UV stabilized requirement shall be
applied for outdoor installations and their surface finish and due
certification be provided by manufacturer as necessary.
C. Manufacturer and PV specialist to calculate how much module power
will be lost or gained due to temperature shifts. In hot climates, cell
temperatures can reach an excess of 70 deg.
2.15 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the
manufacturer agreeing to repair, restore or replace any defective
equipment specified in this section during the specified warranty
period.
B. PV modules shall be provided with Product and Power Output
warranties as follows:
 Warranty of PV panels (including PV modules, junction boxes,
bypass diodes, cables and connectors associated with the modules) is
to be 10 years product warranty from the date of Taking Over
Certificate and with 90% minimum output power from the rated
power at STC for the first 10 years and 80% or more, for the
remaining period, Inverters, DC combiner boxes minimum warranty
is to be 5 years from the date of Taking Over Certificate.
 Mounting Structures: Product warranty of Ten (10) years from the
date of Taking Over Certificate.
 DC cables shall be provided with manufacturer’s warranty for
twenty-five
 years from the date of Taking Over Certificate.

 All other system components shall be provided with a minimum of
two years warranty from the date of Taking Over Certificate.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of components in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Coordinate PV system works with work of other trades for proper time
and sequence to avoid construction delays.
C. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or
defects.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment and components according to "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods" and comply with EN 50380.
B. All system components which may be energized during daylight shall
be labelled as required in local codes and regulations, in addition to a
"Live during Daylight" label.
C. Modules shall have a highly visible warning label regarding shock
hazard, and it shall be applied near module’s connection means.
D. Labelling and identification of all conductors, equipment and
disconnection devices shall comply with the following Standards:
 IEC 60364-7-712
 IEC TS 62738
 IEC 62548
 IEC 62446-1
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust components and systems for correct function and operation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as required.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools, and
equipment.
B. Cleanup shall be performed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Cleaning strategy shall be developed covering the cleaning method and
cleaning frequency while considering the site’s environmental

condition and in order to ensure that the maximum annual loss due to
soiling doesn’t exceed 3%.
D. PV modules cleaning can be either manual or automatic and can be
performed using water or dry systems. The contractor shall propose the
most suitable type of cleaning system, subject to the Employer’s
approval.
E. The proposed cleaning system shall be suitable for regular scheduled
cleaning of all installed PV modules, in addition to non-scheduled
cleaning as necessary.
F. In case water cleaning system is proposed, the method of providing the
required water quality shall be verified by the contractor based on the
cleaning system specifications, manufacturer’s recommendations, and
the available water quality on site, such that the modules warranty is
not invalidated.
G. The contractor’s proposal shall include detailed information on the
proposed cleaning system including the manufacturer’s data sheets,
detailed operation manuals, maintenance requirements, warranties,
water consumption, recommended cleaning schedule...etc.

N. Electric Vehicle Charging stations:
1. GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
sections.
B. The transition to electric mobility is a promising global strategy for
decarbonizing the transport sector and reduce demand on fossil fuels
as such from our responsibility towards green environment ACUD will
aim to provide an accessible and robust network of electric vehicle
(EV) charging infrastructure which is an essential pre-requisite to
achieving this ambitious transition and coping with market variations
C. For the purpose of this document the definition of EV shall be any
licensed road Vehicle propelled in full or part by an electric motor
using batteries charged from an external source (i.e., are plugged into
an electricity supply).
1.2 SCOPE
A. This guide covers different EV charger types required to charge the
batteries of electric vehicles EVs). Moreover, it will provide technical
specification requirements and Standards to be considered for safe
charging, standardized network power quality, ensure communication
for monitor\control of the system and unification of electric charging
to avoid an isolation of electric vehicles.
1.3 STANDARDS
The chargers shall have Third party certification of the following
standards:
A. IEC 62196
B. IEC 61851
C. CHAdeMO V.1.2
D. The chargers shall comply with the following standards.
E. IEC 61000-6 for Electromagnetic compatibility
F. Radio Equipment Directive (RED) 2014/53/EU
G. Ingress protection according to IEC 60529.
H. Impact protection according to EN 62262.
I. Book (5) – Egyptian Electric Utility and Consumer Protection
Regulatory Agency.

Electric vehicle charging stations
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 EV Charging Station specified types:
A. Type I: Charger supports charging with AC and support Mode-3
charging mode.
a. Description: AC socket, up to 11 KW (16A/400V) in accordance
with IEC 61851-1 and IEC 62196-2, Mode-3, Type-1.
b. AC Cable with connector shall be rated 11 KW (16A/400V) in
accordance with IEC 61851-1 and IEC 62196-2, Mode-3, Type-1.
B. Type II: Charger supports charging with AC and support following
charging mode-3, AC socket,
a. Description: above 11 kw up to 22 KW (32A/400V) in accordance
with IEC 61851-1 and IEC 62196-2, Mode-3, Type-2.
b. AC Cable with connector shall be 22KW (32A/400V) in
accordance with IEC 61851-1 and IEC 62196-2, Mode-3, Type-2.
C. Type III: Charger supports charging with DC and support following
charging Mode-4, as per following types:
a. Type III-A Description: rating above 22 kW up to 50 kW and shall
comply to the following requirements:
 Combined charging system (CCS) protocol, 50KW DC, 125A,
400V
 IEC 61851-24, covering the communication between charger and
Electric vehicle.
 DC connectors: IEC 62196-3.
 CHAdeMO 1.2, 50 kW DC, 125 A, 500V.
 DC Connector: JEVS G105.
b. Type III-B Description: rating above 50 kW up to 100 kW and shall
comply to the following requirements:
 Combined charging system (CCS) protocol, 100KW DC, 250A,
400V
Electric vehicle.
 CHAdeMO 1.2, 100 kW DC, 200 A, 500V.
 DC Connector: JEVS G105.
c. Type III-C Description: rating above 100 kW and shall comply to
the following requirements:
 Combined charging system (CCS) protocol, up to 900V
Electric vehicle.
 CHAdeMO 3, up to 1000V.
2.2 AC Input:
A. Input connection shall be 3Phase with neutral and earth connection.
B. Earthing systems are allowed TN-S.
C. Input voltage shall be 400 Volts with 50-60Hz with (+/-) 10%
variation.
D. Input current and power shall be as follows.
 Type I: AC 11 KW, 16 A
 Type II: AC 22 KW, 32 A
 Type III: AC up to 150KW, maximum input current 277 A.
E. The total harmonic restoration THDi value of device should not exceed
4% at full power.
F. Minimum efficiency of device shall be 95% at nominal output power.
G. Device shall operate with a power factor of 0.96 or above at full rated
power.
H. Maximum leakage current shall be 0.8 mA and shall be confirmed with
CE certification.
2.3 AC Output Mode 3:
 AC output charging shall be as the following:
A. AC Cable and connector for 11 KW shall be rated (16A/400V)
B. AC Cable and connector for 22 kW shall be rated (32A / 400V).
2.4 DC Output Mode 4:
A. DC output charging shall be with the global standard CCS and
CHAdeMO protocol.
B. CCS as well as CHAdeMO DC outlets are interoperable with all
vehicles on the market as per applicable standards.
C. DC output power shall be 150 KW continuous during the complete
charging session as minimum.
D. CCS: the output voltage must be within the range of 200-920 V DC
according to the future demand from the battery management system
of the vehicle to be charged.
E. CHAdeMO: the output voltage must be within the range of 50-1000 V
DC according to the future demand from the battery management
system of the vehicle to be charged.
F. Charger with multiple power modules (inverters) with evenly spread
capacity, in case of a power module becomes defective, the faulty
power module can be switched off and the charger can continue to
operate.
2.5 User interface and payment:
A. The charger shall be with a minimum 7 "color daylight readable touch
screen for operating the charger and indicate status and feedback to
user about the charger.
B. RFID for identification of the user is accordance with ISO 14443 A +
B to part 4 and ISO / IEC 15693 standards. Mifare, NFC, Ultralight,
PayPass, HID and other types of authorization.
C. Chargers can be equipped with an integrated payment terminal to
facilitate payment by credit card and NFC. A payment terminal enables
paid charging without a membership model and without the need of a
back office. Payment by Credit Card or NFC can be done on either time
or consumption.
D. For interfaces criteria selection will be subject to further coordination
with ACUD, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 Construction and other details:
2.6.1 Construction
A. The charger device shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use.
B. Charging cable length shall be 5 meter to ensure ease charging.
C. Chargers shall be designed to comply with the EMC emission
requirements for residential use, as per IEC 61000-6-3 Class B.
D. Ingress protection shall be IP54 with IK10 for main body and
IK08 for touch screen for vandalism.
E. Charger body should be manufactured from coated stainless
steel or other robust material.
F. Operating temperature shall be between -10°C to +55 °C.
G. The charger shall be able to be used area up to 2500 m.
H. Considering indoor use sound level should not exceed 70 dB
sound when running full power.
2.6.2 Fire Protection:
A. The product enclosure shall serve as fireproof according to IEC
60950-1. If fire happens inside the charger, enclosure shall be
designed in such way that keep the fire inside and prevent the
spreading of fire outside.
2.7 Connectivity
A. Data provider shall guarantee data communication according to ISO
27001.
B. The device shall be provided with GSM / 3G modem with SIM card
and telecom provider subscription or 10/100 Base-T Ethernet
connection.
C. With standard API’s and other tools, the chargers shall offer
integrations with
 Service provider’s back-office systems (OCPP 1.6 upgradable to
OCPP 2)
 Energy management solutions.
 Payment services.
D. In case integration with the service provider’s back-office systems not
executed, web tools can provide operators with real-time status
information and usage statistics. This information can be exported to
Microsoft Excel.
E. A web tools enables remote diagnostics and troubleshooting of units,
making use of a broader set of data than what can be supported by
OCPP Also allows for advanced remote repair activities, which in most
of cases prevent a site delegation, thereby reducing time to repair and
minimizing operational costs
F. The communications line from the EV fast charger to the customer
endpoint is completely secured and handled according to ISO 27001
by a certified data center.
G. The software update of the device can be done remotely.
2.8 SAFETY:
Charger shall be with following safety features:
A. Chargers shall be protected against Lightning/switching surges if
required and recommended by EV charger manufacturer and subject to
the approval of responsible engineer. If required, surge protection
device shall be in compliance with IEC 61643.
B. Power module in the AC supply shall be protected by suitable rated
molded case circuit breaker.
C. DC output of power module shall be protected by suitably rated fuse.
D. Type 2 connector in the AC side shall be protected by circuit breaker
of adequate rating.
E. RCD protection is to be provided by the EV charger manufacturer as
per his recommendations.
F. Chargers’ system shall be provided with emergency stop pushbutton.
G. Cabinet door shall be provided with door open detection. CCS
connector shall be provided with temperature sensor.
H. CHAdeMO. Connector shall be with locking.
I. AC contactor in Type-2 charging shall be with monitoring facility.
J. Cabinet shall be monitored for humidity and temperature with control.
K. For outdoor EV Chargers should be installed in shed otherwise supplier
shall prove with supported documents computability of the chargers in
such circumstances.
L. EV charger output power shall be ambient temperature derated at
specified ambient conditions and corresponding temperature within the
enclosures.

O. MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED LIST
1. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE/ LOW VOLTAGE CABLES:

A. Energya
B. Egyptian cables co. (ECM)
C. Electro cable Egypt (ECE)
D. EL SEWEDY CABLES
E. GC3
F. Gulf cables (GC)
G. BICC
2. MV/LV CABLE CONNECTORS:
A. Raychem
B. 3M
C. B.I.C.C.
D. Nexans
E. Prysmian
3. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
F. Furse
G. Erico
H. Wallis
I. BICC
4. PRIMARY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS AND RING MAIN
UNITS:
A. ABB
B. Schneider
C. EMAS
D. Eaton
5. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER:
A. ABB
B. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC
C. ELSEWEDY
D. EGYTRAFO
E. G.E.
F. SEIMENS

Manufacturers recommended list
6. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER KIOSK:
A. ABB
B. ELSEWEDY
7. LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR, FEEDER PILLARS AND
LIGHTING PANELS (INDOOR AND OUTDOOR TYPE)
A. Schneider
B. ABB
C. Legrand
D. GE
E. EMAS
8. ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES:

A. EATON / Cutler-Hammer.
B. G. E.
C. Siemens
D. Schneider Electric
E. Power Bar (PB)
F. LS
9. EXTERIOR LIGHTING:
A. Lighting Fixtures:
 General Electric (ERS) (U.S.A)
 LED Roadway Lighting (NXT Series) (Canada)
 Schreder (PIANO) (Portugal)
 Schreder (AMPERA) (Spain)
 Philips (LUMA) (Spain)
 Philips (SPEED STAR) (France)
B. Lighting Poles:
 INCO STEEL (Egypt)
 EL-Sewedy (Egypt)
 El-Babtin (Egypt)
C. Control system:
 Phoenix contact
 Schreder
 Philips
 Osram

10. PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY SYSTEM
A. PV modules:
 Panasonic
 Trina Solar
 LG
 Canadian Solar
 SunPower
 SunTech
B. Inverters:
 FRONIUS
 SMA
 ABB
 Schneider Electric
 KACO
11. Electric vehicle charging stations:
A. ABB
B. Schneider
C. Siemens
D. Charger point

For any Non listed manufacturer shall submit the listed prequalification
below for approval of additional:
Item
1. Compliance sheet with ACUD specs
2. Catalogues and Datasheets
3. Products Type test certificates
4. ISO
5. EEHC certificates
6. EEHC tests
7. Operation continuity (5 years)
8. Past Experience in similar projects
9. Company portfolio
10. Financial statements for the past three years

Authorization letter need to be signed and stamped from the
11. manufacturer indicating authorized product and period of authorization
(for representative /panel builder)
12. Tax card
13. Commercial registration

III.Quality Guideline for Electrical
Works

Quality guideline for electrical works
A. Testing quality procedures
1. Transformers
1.1 Type tests
A. Type tests should be carried out on one transformer for each type.
B. Type test should include and not limited to the following:
a. Temperature rise test - IEC 60076-2/60076-11
b. Lightning impulse test - IEC 60076-3/60076-11
c. Sound level measurement - IEC 60076-10
1.1.1 Standard and special tests:
A. Standard tests:
a. Temperature rise test - IEC 60076-2/60076-11
b. Lightning impulse test - IEC 60076-3/60076-11
c. Sound level measurement - IEC 60076-10
a. Measuring zero-sequence impedance.
b. Measuring insulation resistance.
c. Measuring of harmonics of the no-load current.
d. Measuring of the dissipation factor (tan δ) of the insulation
resistance capacitances
e. Anti-corrosion protection measurement.
B. These tests are carried out in accordance with the relative IEC,
IEEE, ANSI and/or UNE standards.
C. Supplier shall follow latest IEC updates and provide all above-
mentioned related test certificates and reports.
1.2 Routine Tests:
A. Supplier shall submit and provide all bellow-mentioned related test
certificates and reports for all individual components tested by the
factory.
B. Routine tests should be applied on each transformer in accordance with
the requirements of IEC 60076-11 standards for dry type transformer.
Routine tests should include and not limited to the following:
a. Measurement of winding resistance.
b. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement
c. Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss
d. Measurement of no-load loss and current.
e. Applied voltage dielectric test.
f. Induced A.C withstand voltage test.

Testing quality procedures
g. Partial discharge measurement (the value should be less than 10
pC).
1.2.1 Measurement of winding resistance
Purpose of the Test:
 Although, the winding resistance values are not the guaranteed
values given to the customers, they are needed in connection with
the load loss measurement when the load losses are corrected to
correspond to the reference (e.g., 75°C) temperature.
 The resistance measurement will also show whether the winding
joints are appropriate, and the windings are correctly connected.
 Winding resistance measurement shall be performed when the
windings are at ambient temperature without supply for a time long
enough to achieve this condition. The measurements shall be
carried out in direct current between terminals according to
the sequence U-V; V-W; WU.
 Ambient temperature shall also be measured. It shall result as the
average value of three measurements performed by apposite
thermal sensors.
(1) HV winding resistance measurement:
A. HV winding resistance measurement shall be performed by
measuring simultaneously voltage and current.
B. The voltmeter and ammeter must be connected as follows:
a. Voltmeter terminals must be connected beyond current
cables.
b. The current shall not exceed 10% of winding rated current.
c. The measurement shall be carried out after voltage and
current are stable.
C. Unless otherwise agreed, the HV winding shall be connected
on principal tapping.
(2) LV winding resistance measurement
A. LV winding resistance measurement shall be performed by

measuring simultaneously voltage and current.
B. The voltmeter and ammeter shall be connected as follows:
a. Voltmeter terminals shall be connected beyond current
cables.
b. The current shall not exceed 5% of winding rated current.
C. The measurement shall be carried out after voltage and current
are stable.

1.2.2 Measurement of voltage ratio and check of vector relationship
Purpose of the Test:
A. Verification of no-load voltage ratios specified by the
specification and detection of any problem within the coils or
tapping connections.
B. Because of the bearing on the parallel operation of two or more
transformers.
C. Voltage ratio measurement and check of polarities and
connections shall be performed on all tap changer positions. The
correspondence between the numbers assigned to the trappings
and the ratings shall also be checked.
D. Voltage ratio measurement shall be performed phase by phase
between the terminals of corresponding windings.
E. Voltage ratio measurement is carried out by use of potentiometric
method.

1.2.3 Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss
A. Short-circuit (load) losses and short-circuit impedance voltage
are guaranteed and reported values by the manufacturer to
customers.
B. Rated current is generally applied to the H.V. winding while L.V.
winding is short-circuited.
C. The short-circuit loss and the short-circuit voltage show the

performance of the transformer. These values are recorded and
guaranteed to the customer and important for operational

economy. The short-circuit voltage is an important criteria incase
of parallel operations of the transformers.
D. The short-circuit loss is a data which is also used in the heat test.
E. Short-circuit voltage is the voltage applied to the primary
winding and causes the rated current to flow in the winding
couples while one of the winding couples is short circuited. The
active loss measured during this, is called short-circuit loss. If the
adjusting range is more than 5%, in addition to the rated value,
the losses are repeated for the maximum and minimum values.
F. The short-circuit loss is composed of “Joule’’ losses (direct
current/DC losses) which is formed by the load current in the
winding and the additional losses (alternating current/AC losses)
in the windings, core pressing arrangements, tank walls and
magnetic screening (if any) by the leakage (scatter) fluxes.
G. In general, the HV windings of the transformer are supplied while
the LV windings are short-circuited.
H. During measurement, the current must be at the value of IN or
close to this value as far as possible. The voltage, current and
short-circuit losses of each phase should be measured during
measurement.
I. In cases where the power supply is not sufficient to supply the
measurement circuit, compensation to meet the reactive power
must be made using capacitors. Before beginning to measure, the
transformer winding temperature must be stabilized, and the
winding temperature and winding resistances must be measured.
J. In order to avoid increasing the winding temperature by the
applied current, the measurement must be completed in a short
time and the measuring current must be kept between
25%…100% of the rated current. In this way, the measurement
errors due to winding temperature increase will be minimized.
K. The losses must be corrected based on reference temperature
(e.g., 75°C) stated in the standards and evaluated.
L. The short-circuit voltage and losses which are found at the
temperature which the measurement was made, must be
corrected according to this reference temperature.

1.2.4 Measurement of no-load loss and current
A. In the no-load measurement the no-load losses Po and the no-
load current Io of the transformer are determined at rated voltage
and rated frequency.
B. The no-load loss is developed by the excitation of the
transformer, and it represents a considerable amount of energy
during the lifetime of the transformer.
C. This test is performed by supplying LV windings at rated
frequency and rated voltage. The wave shape shall be as nearly
as possible of the sinewave and the primary windings shall be
open.
D. The frequency of the test shall not differ from the rated value
more than ± 1%. No-load current and loss shall be measured as
well as the mean value and the effective value of the voltage.

E. If these two readings are equal, no correction shall be applied on
the measurement of no-load loss. Otherwise, no-load loss shall
be referred to sine-wave condition in accordance with IEC
Standards 60076-1.
F. No-load current shall result as the average value of three readings
performed by effective value ammeters. Three wattmeters shall
be used to measure the power, by using instrument transformers
and transducers when necessary.
1.2.5 Dielectric tests, Separate-source voltage withstand test

Purpose of the test
A. The purpose of the separate source AC withstand test or applied
voltage test (according to IEEE) is to verify the integrity of the
main insulation.
B. This main insulation does not only mean the insulation system
between the two windings (major insulation), but also -more
generally the insulation between the winding and earth (end
insulation) and all connections to earth and to each other.
C. The single-phase applied voltage wave shape shall be
approximately sinusoidal. The test must be performed at rated
frequency. At the end of the test, the test voltage shall be rapidly
reduced up to 1/3 the full voltage before disconnection.
D. The full test voltage shall be applied for 60 seconds between the
winding under test and all the remaining windings, magnetic
core, frame, and enclosure connected to earth.

E. The test shall be performed on all the windings. The test is
successful if no failure occurs at full test voltage.
1.2.6 Induced over-voltage withstand test

A. The object of the test is to secure that the insulation between the
phase windings, turns, coils, tapping leads and terminals, for non-
uniformly insulated windings also the insulation between these
parts and earth, withstand the temporary over voltages and
switching overvoltage to which the transformer may be subjected
during its lifetime.
B. The test voltage shall be twice the value corresponding to the
rated voltage. It shall be applied between the terminals of
the secondary windings, by maintaining the primary winding
open. The duration of the test at full voltage shall be 60 s, and the
frequency twice the rated value.
C. The test shall start with a voltage lower than 1/3 the full test
voltage, and it shall be quickly increased up to full value.
D. At the end of the test, the voltage shall be rapidly reduced up to
1/3 the rated value before disconnection. The test is successful if
no failure occurs at full test voltage.

1.2.7 Partial discharge measurement
A. A partial discharge measurement (PD-measurement) is a
nondestructive tool used to establish the condition of a
transformer insulation system.
B. The goal of partial discharge measurement is to certify that no
harmful PD-sources exist.
C. All PD measuring methods are based on the detection of PD
current impulses I(t) circulating in the parallel‐connected
capacitors Ck (coupling capacitor) and Ct (test object
capacitance) via measuring impedance Zm.
D. Present IEC and IEEE Standards have both established rules for
measuring and evaluating electric signals caused by partial
discharges together with specifications on permissible
magnitude. The IEC approach to the processing of the recorded
electric signal is different from the IEEE approach.
E. IEC transforms the signal to an apparent electric charge generally
measured in picocoulombs (pC), while IEEE transforms the
signal to a Radio Interference Voltage (RIV), generally measured
in micro volts (μV). The use of the RIV‐method for PD‐signal
detection will be abandoned, although the IEEE standard has not
yet been officially approved.
F. The detection of apparent charge in pC is the preferred method
now in use in IEEE Std. C57.113.
G. For the detection of apparent charge, the integration of the PD‐
current impulses I(t) is required.
H. Integration of the PD current impulses can be performed either in
the time domain (digital oscilloscope) or in the frequency domain
(band‐pass filter). Most PD systems available on the market
perform a “quasi-integration” of the PD current impulses in the
frequency domain using a “wide‐band” or “narrow‐band” filter.

I. Circulating PD current impulses – generated by an external PD
source (in the test circuit) or by an internal PD source (in the
insulating system of the transformer) – can only be measured at
the transformer bushings.
J. Bushing capacitance C1, represents the coupling capacitor Ck,
which is connected in parallel with capacitance Ct (test object =
total capacitance of the transformer insulating system).
1.2.8 FAT TEST

Refer to all previous routine tests.
1.2.9 SAT TEST
A. Measurement of winding resistance.
B. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement.
C. insulation resistance test.
2. Cables
2.1 type tests
All type tests had to be performed by accredited laboratories. The type test
reports to be submitted shall include as the following:
A. Electrical tests on completed cable:
a. Bending test, followed by partial discharge test.

b. Insulation resistance test at ambient temperature.
c. Insulation resistance test at ambient temperature.
d. Tan δ measurements
e. Heating cycle test followed by partial discharge test.
f. Impulse test followed by a voltage test.
g. Voltage test for 4 hours
h. Resistivity of semi-conducting screen.
B. Non-Electrical tests on cable components:
a. Measurement of thickness of insulation.
b. Measurement of thickness of non-metal sheaths.
c. Test for determining mechanical properties of insulation before and
after ageing.
d. Test for determining mechanical properties of non-metal sheaths
before and after ageing.
e. Additional ageing test on pieces of completed cables
f. Loss of mass test on PVC sheath.
g. Hot set test for XLPE insulation.
h. Shrinkage test for XLPE insulation.
i. Test for resistance of PVC insulation and sheath to cracking (heat
shock test).
Supplier shall follow latest IEC updates and provide all above-mentioned
related test certificates and reports.
2.2 Routine Tests (Sample test)
factory.
B. Repetition of tests
a. If any sample fails in any of the tests in Clause 16, two further
samples shall be taken from the same batch and submitted to the
same test or tests in which the original sample failed. If both
additional samples pass the tests, all the cables in the batch from
which they were taken shall be regarded as complying with the
requirements of this standard. If either of the additional samples
fails, the batch from which they were taken shall be regarded as
failing to comply.
b. Number of samples for sample tests

2.2.1 Conductor Examination (MV and LV)
A. Test Procedures:
a. Check on the (No. of wires).
b. Outer Diameter.
c. Conductor shape.
B. Acceptance Criteria:
a. No. of Wires Outer Diameter Conductor Shape As per
technical offer.
b. Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.4 IEC 60228 LV
c. Clause No.: IEC 60502-2Clause 17.4 IEC 60228 MV
2.2.2 Check of dimensions:
Test procedures:
A. LV:
(1) Measurement of the thickness of insulation: The test piece
shall be placed under the measuring equipment with the plan
of the perpendicular to the optical axis, six measurements
shall be made radially.
 Acceptance Criteria:
Insulation thickness tmin ≥ 0,9 tn
0,1 tav ≥ tnom As per the technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.5IEC 60811-201.
(2) Measurement of the thickness of sheathing including extruded
separation sheaths, but excluding inner extruded coverings:
The test piece shall be placed under the measuring equipment
with the plan of the perpendicular to the optical axis, six
measurements shall be made radially.
Sheath thickness tmin ≥ 0,8tn – 0,2As per technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.5 IEC 60811-202
(3) For Armour Cables (Cables which have SWA) only:
a. The diameter of round wires shall be measured by means
of a micrometer having two flat noses to an accuracy of
±0,01 mm.
b. Two measurements shall be made at right angles to each
other at the same position and the average of the two values
taken as the diameter.
The dimensions of armour wires shall not fall below the
nominal values by more than 5% for round wires; As per
technical offer.
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.7.1, 16.7.3
(4) For Armour Cables (Cables which have STA) only:
a. Measurement of armour tape shall be made with a
micrometer having two flat noses of approximately 5 mm
in diameter to an accuracy of ± 0,01 mm.
b. For tapes up to 40 mm in width the thickness shall be
measured at the center of the width.
The dimensions of armour tapes shall not fall below the
nominal values by more than 10 % Screen As per technical
offer.
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.7.2, 16.7.3
(5) For (Cables which have Lead only)
Lead or lead alloy sheath the measurements shall be made on
a ring of the sheath carefully cut from the sample. The
thickness shall be determined at a sufficient number of points
around the circumference of the ring to ensure that the
minimum thickness is measured.
Lead or lead alloy sheath tmin ≥ 0,95 tn – 0,1As per
technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.6
(6) Measurement of the overall diameter: The circumference of
the cord or cable shall be measured by means of a measuring
tape and the diameter shall be calculated alternatively, or a
direct diameter measuring tape can be used.
Overall diameter as per technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.8IEC 60811-203
B. MV
(1) Measurement of the thickness of insulation: The test piece
shall be placed under the measuring equipment with the plane
of the cut perpendicular to the optical axis, six measurements
shall be taken from the test piece.

Insulation thickness tmin ≥ 0,9 tn
0,1(tmax – tmin)/ tmax≤ 0,15 as per technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-2Clause 17.5.2IEC 60811-201
(2) Measurement of thickness of non-metallic sheath: The test
piece shall be placed under the measuring equipment with the
plan of the cut perpendicular to the optical axis, six
measurements shall be made radially.
Sheath thickness tmin ≥ 0,8tn – 0,2 As per technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-2Clause 17.5.3IEC 60811-202
(3) For Cables (Cables which have CTS or ATA or STA) only
Measurement of armour/screen tape: The measurement shall
be made with a micrometer having two flat noses of
approximately 5 mm in diameter to an accuracy of ± 0,01 mm.
For tapes up to 40 mm in width the thickness shall be
measured at the center of the width
The dimensions of screen tapes shall not fall below the
nominal values by more than: 10 % for tapes.
Armour Tape as per the technical offer
Screen Tape as per the technical offer
(4) For Cables (which have CWS or AWA or SWA) only
Measurement on armor/screen wires: The diameter of round
wires shall be measured by means of a micrometer having two
flat noses to an accuracy of ±0,01 mm. For round wires, two
measurements shall be made at right angles to each other at
the same position and the average of the two values taken as
the diameter.
The dimensions of armour wires shall not fall below the
nominal values by more than:5 % for round wires
screen/Amour wires as per the technical offer
(5) For (Cables which have Lead only)
Measurement of thickness of lead sheath: The measurements
shall be made on a ring of the sheath carefully cut from the
sample. The thickness shall be determined at a sufficient
number of points around the circumference of the ring to
ensure that the minimum thickness is measured.

Lead thickness tmin ≥ 0,95 tn – 0,1 as per the technical offer
(6) Measurement of the overall diameter.
a. For cables with overall dimensions not exceeding 25 mm,
the measurements shall be made by means of a
micrometer, a profile projector or similar apparatus, in two
directions perpendicular to each other
b. If the overall diameter exceeds 25 mm, the circumference
of the cable shall be measured by means of a measuring
tape, and the diameter shall be calculated. Alternatively, a
direct reading diameter tape can be used
Overall diameter as per the technical offer
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-2Clause 17.8 IEC 60811-203
2.2.3 Hot set test for XLPE insulations (LV and MV)
A. Test Procedures:
(1) Dumb‐bell test pieces is prepared from the insulation (semi
conducting layers is removed).
(2) The test pieces shall be suspended in the oven and weights
attached to the lower grip of the Samples under test.
(3) Punch Press (To make the dumbbell shaped sample of XLPE
for hot set test).
(4) Hot set test oven (Heraeus) 10% Each Batch test pieces to
exert the specified force. (20 N/CM2).
(5) After the oven has regained temperature(5min). the test pieces
are held in the oven 10min. (Temperature 200 ±3°C).
(6) The distance between the marker lines shall be measured so
the elongation can be calculated.
(7) The Tensile force shall then be removed from the test piece,
and the test piece left to recover for 5 min at the specified
temperature.
(8) The test piece shall then be removed from the oven and
allowed to cool slowly to ambient temperature for 5 min then
the elongation shall be measured again.
B. Test conditions: oven temp (200 ±3°c)
C. Acceptance Criteria:
 Elongation with load ≤175%Permanent elongation without
load ≤15%.
 LV Clause No.: IEC 60502-1Clause 16.9IEC 60811-507.
 MV Clause No.: IEC 60502-2 Clause 17.10 IEC 60811-507.
2.2.4 Voltage test for 4h (MV)
A. Test Procedures:
(1) The sample shall be a piece of completed cable at least 5 m in
length between the test terminations.
(2) The test voltage shall be 4 Uo kV.
(3) The test voltage (between each conductor and the metal
layer(s)) shall be increased gradually to the specified value
and maintained for 4 h.
B. Test conditions: The frequency of the alternating test voltages
shall be in the range 49 Hz to 61 Hz.
 No breakdown of the insulation shall occur
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-2 Clause17.9
2.3 Routine tests (for complete package)
2.3.1 Measurement of the electrical dc resistance of conductors (MV
and LV):
A. Resistance measurements shall be made on all conductors of each
cable length submitted to the routine tests, including the
concentric conductor, if any.
B. The complete cable length, or a sample from it, shall be placed in
the test room, which shall be maintained at a reasonably constant
temperature, for at least 12 h before the test. In case of doubt as
to whether the conductor temperature is the same as the room
temperature, the resistance shall be measured after the cable has
been in the test room for 24 h.
C. Alternatively, the resistance can be measured on a sample of
conductor conditioned for at least 1 h in a temperature controlled
liquid bath.
D. The measured value of resistance shall be corrected to a
temperature of 20 °C and 1km length in accordance with the
formulae and factors given in IEC 60228.
E. The D.C. resistance of each conductor at 20 °C shall not exceed
the appropriate maximum value specified in IEC 60228.
F. For concentric conductors, the resistance shall comply with
national regulations and/or standards.
G. Test Procedures:
(1) The cable terminals are connected to the testing device.

(2) The measured value of resistance corrected by the measuring
device to a temperature of 20 °C and 1 km length.
(3) Measurement shall be made on all conductors including the
concentric conductor (If any).
H. Test conditions: Test shall be made at an ambient temperature of
(20 ± 15) °C.
I. Acceptance Criteria:
 The D.C. resistance of each conductor at 20 °C shall not exceed
as the per technical offer OHM/Km
 LV Clause No.: IEC 60502-1 - Clause 15.2 IEC 60228
 MV Clause No.: IEC 60502-2 Clause 16.2
2.3.2 Partial discharge test (MV and LV)
The partial discharge test shall be caried out in accordance with
IEC60885-3 except that the sensitivity as defined in IEC 60885-3
shall be 10 pC or better. The voltage being applied between
conductor and the screen.
A. Test Procedures:
(1) The test shall be carried out on all insulated cores, the voltage
being applied between each conductor and the screen.
(2) The test voltage shall be raised gradually to and held at 2U₀
for 10 s and then slowly reduced to 1,73 Uo.
B. Test conditions:
The frequency of the alternating test voltages shall be in the range
49 Hz to 61 Hz.
 There shall be no detectable discharge exceeding 10 pC from
the test object at 1,73 Uo
2.3.3 Voltage test:
A. Low Voltage cables:
a. Test Procedures:
(1) For rated Voltage (0.6/1 kV):
The conductors may be suitably connected for successive
applications of the test voltage of 3.5 kV to limit the total
testing time, provided that the sequence of connections
ensures that the voltage is applied for at least 5 min without
interruption between each conductor and each other
conductor and between each conductor and the metallic
layers, if any.
(2) For rated Voltage (1.8/3 kV):
The conductors may be suitably connected for successive
applications of the test voltage of 6.5 kV to limit the total
testing time, provided that the sequence of connections
ensures that the voltage is applied for at least 5 min without
interruption between each conductor and each other
conductor and between each conductor and the metallic
layers, if any.
b. Test conditions: The frequency of the alternating test voltages
shall be in the range 49 Hz to 61 Hz.
c. Acceptance Criteria:
B. Medium Voltage cables
a. The voltage test shall be made at ambient temperature, using
either alternating voltage at power frequency or direct voltage,
at the manufacturer’s option.
b. Test Procedures:
(1) For single‐core cables
the test voltage 3,5 Uo shall be applied for 5 min between
the conductor and the metal screen.
(2) For three‐core cables with individually screened cores
the test voltage 3,5 Uo shall be applied for 5min between
each conductor and the metal layer.
(3) For three‐core cables without individually screened cores
the test voltage 3,5 Uo shall be applied for 5 min in
succession between each insulated conductor and all the
other conductors and collective metal layers.
(4) Three‐core cables may be tested in a single operation by
using a three‐phase transformer.
c. Test conditions:
The frequency of the alternating test voltages shall be in the
range 49 Hz to 61 Hz.
d. Acceptance Criteria:
2.3.4 Electrical test on over sheath of the cable (MV)
A. Test Procedures:
(1) For cables which have graphite coating over sheath only
A d.c. voltage of 8 kV per millimeter of the specified nominal
thickness of the extruded over sheath shall be applied for 1
min between the underlying metal layer at negative polarity
and the outer conducting layer, subject to a maximum voltage
of 25 kV.
B. Acceptance Criteria:
 No breakdown of the over sheath shall occur.
 Clause No.: IEC 60502-2 cluase16.5 IEC 60229Cluase3.1
2.3.5 FAT tests
Refer to all previous routine tests.
2.3.6 SAT tests
Electrical tests after installation:
A. LV
a. Insulation resistance test for one minute.
B. MV
a. Voltage test:
The voltage shall applied by 80 % of last test for one minute
between the conductor and the metal screen. The power
frequency test voltage shall be 3.5 U0 as shown in below table:
 Rated voltage U0 (kV) 12 18
 Test voltage (kV) 42 63
 No breakdown of the insulation shall occur.
3. Primary Medium voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units

3.1 Type tests
A. A switchgear MUST withstand voltage in normal and abnormal
conditions and to carry varying load currents during its lifetime. A
switchgear MUST be able to clear faults occurring due to various
unavoidable reasons and to carry fault current in case of through-faults.
Type tests are the proof that a switchgear can fulfill all these
requirements.
B. As a result of all this, the switchgear MUST safeguard power system
from severe damage while also being safe for operating workers and
other equipment in the case of a breakdown in the switchgear panel.
C. The performance of a switchgear in normal and abnormal situations
MUST be confirmed by subjecting it to various types of tests, the
parameters for which are outlined in National and International
standards in order to cover as many practical scenarios as feasible.
Equipment testing begins with the idea stage, when the maker

examines all conceivable parameters to ensure the equipment’s long-
term performance.
D. The number of test samples provided in IEC 62271-100 should be used
for all type tests.
E. Dielectric Tests
 The power system experiences occasional temporary power
frequency over voltages, which arises during load throw, wrong
transformer OLTC operation, insufficient shunt compensation,
resonance, etc. Dielectric tests are performed to verify the rated
insulation strength of the switchgear to ascertain that when a circuit
breaker is put into service, its design is capable of withstanding over
voltages occurring due to above reasons and due to lightning,
switching operations, etc.
 This is verified in compliance with the Standards. The tests which are
performed under this category are discussed below.
3.1.1 One-Minute Dry-power frequency voltage withstand test
A. This test is carried out to verify the capability of the equipment to
withstand the power frequency test voltage for one minute in dry
condition. The values of power frequency test voltage with
respect to the system voltage have been identified in the
standards.
3.1.2 One-Minute Wet-power frequency voltage withstand test
A. This is the same as the one-minute dry power frequency voltage
test but is conducted with equipment in wet condition. These are
applicable for outdoor installations only.
3.1.3 Lightning Impulse voltage dry withstand test
A. This test is conducted to verify whether the switchgear is able to
withstand overvoltage due to the peak value of standard impulse
(1.2/50 μs) during lightning.

3.1.4 Switching Impulse voltage withstand test (Optional)
A. This test is optional. It’s conducted to verify whether the
switchgear is able to withstand over voltages due to switching
surges. This test is significant for system voltages above 300 kV.
B. Switching surges are comparatively of a longer duration (2500
μs), lower rate of rise and are represented by standard switching
impulse test wave of 250/2500 μs.
3.1.5 Partial discharge test (Optional)
A. Partial discharge test is a component test and is not recommended
to be carried out on complete switchgear, wherein the design of
the switchgear consists of a combination of conventional
compose. (e.g. CTs and VTs) which can be tested in accordance
with their respective Standards.
B. In the case of switchgear wherein organic insulating material is
used, then this test is recommended, such as in the case
of integrated switchgear design, specially GIS, where live parts
and connections are embedded in solid insulation.
3.1.6 Artificial pollution test
A. These tests are applicable for outdoor installations only and are
carried out on the basis of an agreement between the user and the
manufacturer. The voltage values for the above tests are specified
in standards against the system voltage.
3.1.7 Switchgear design aspects
A. While designing a switchgear, the parts located at different
electric potential MUST be separated by insulation in order to
ensure the safety of personnel working on it and the reliability of
its operations, to prevent phase-to-earth, or phase-to-phase
flashover.
B. The insulation in switchgear serves three main purposes. It
provides insulation:
 Between current-carrying live parts and earth.
 In contact gap during ‘breaker open’ condition; and
 Between current-carrying live parts of different phases.
C. A wide range of materials is used for the purpose of achieving
the above stated insulation. These materials can be solid, liquid,
or gaseous. They are used to fill spaces, support live parts and to
extinguish arc depending upon their physical properties and
form.
D. Gaseous Air
 Gaseous air is the most commonly used gaseous material,
which is composed of 80% nitrogen and 20% oxygen. Its
properties are therefore close to nitrogen. Air clearances
between phases and between phases to earth against the system
voltage are as mentioned to IEC 62271-100.
 A recent addition to the list of gases used to fill the switchgear
enclosure is SF6 gas which has a dielectric strength of
approximately three times that of air. It serves the dual purpose
of acting as both an insulation medium as well as an arc-
quenching medium.
 Among gases, air is the only insulating material which can be
used effectively at atmospheric pressure.
E. Fluids
 A range of fluids has been used for insulation in
switchgear. Hydrogen carbon oil often referred to as
‘transformer oil’ was being used in bulk oil CB. It has the
advantage of fulfilling the dual role of both an insulation as well
as an arc-extinguishing medium. Its dielectric strength is three
times that of SF6 at atmospheric pressure.
 Supplier shall follow latest IEC updates and provide all above-
mentioned related test certificates and reports.

3.2 Routine tests
factory.
B. The design of the insulation system for metal-enclosed switchgear is
based upon life expectancy of about 30 years. However, environmental
conditions such as dirt, moisture, and corrosive atmosphere can shorten
the design life.
C. Moisture combined with dirt is the greatest deteriorating factor for
insulation systems because of leakage and tracking, which will result
in eventual failure. Therefore, it is important to maintain the switchgear
insulation and to chart the condition of the primary insulation
system by routine testing.
D. The electrical switchgear may be tested with AC or DC voltage to
check the condition of the insulation of switchgear and circuit breakers.
Before conducting any other tests, an insulation resistance test (by
Megger) should always be conducted first to determine if it is safe to
conduct other HV tests.
E. Also when testing circuit breakers, it is important to check
the condition of the circuit breaker contacts and circuit breaker
operating mechanism to assure that the circuit breaker is opening and
closing as designed.
F. These tests are listed and discussed as follows:
(1) Insulation resistance test
(2) DC or AC hi-pot test
(3) Power factor or dielectric loss test
(4) Circuit breaker contact resistance test
(5) Circuit breaker time–travel analysis test
(6) WIRING CHECK
(7) MECHANICAL TESTS
(8) ELECTRICAL TESTS
3.2.1 Insulation Resistance Measurement Test
A. The insulation resistance measurement test may be conducted on
all types of electrical switchgear using the insulation resistance
megohmmeter commonly known as the MEGGER.
B. The insulation resistance test consists of applying voltage (600–
10,000 V DC) to the apparatus to determine the megohm value
of resistance. This test does not indicate the quality of primary
insulation.
C. Several factors should be remembered when performing this test:

D. The first is that this test can indicate low values of insulation
resistance because of many parallel paths.
E. The other is that an insulation system having low dielectric
strength may indicate high resistance values. In view of this, the
test results should only be interpreted for comparative purposes.
This does not indicate the quality of the primary insulation
system from the point of view of dielectric withstand.
F. When performing insulation testing, it is recommended
that auxiliary equipment, such as potential transformers
and lightning arresters, be removed from the stationary
switchgear.
Typical connection for insulation resistance test of circuit breaker in open position
G. Insulation resistance tests are made with the circuit breaker in

open and closed position, whereas the insulation test for the
switchgear bus is made with one phase to ground at a time, with
the other two phases grounded.
H. The procedure for this test is as follows:
a. Circuit breaker open: Connect HV lead to pole 1. Ground all
other poles. Repeat for poles 2 through 6, in turn, with other
poles grounded.
b. Circuit breaker closed: Connect HV lead to pole 1 or 2, as
convenient, with either pole of phase 2 and 3 grounded. Repeat
for phases 2 and 3 with other phases grounded.
c. Stationary gear (buses): Connect HV lead to phase 1 with
phases 2 and 3 grounded. Repeat the same for phases 2 and 3
with other phases grounded. Also, perform IR tests between
phase 1 and 2 with phase 3 grounded, phase 2 and phase 3 with
phase 1 grounded, and phase 3 and 1 with phase 2 grounded.

3.2.2 High-Potential (Hi-pot) Test
A. DC Hi-Pot Test
a. The DC hi-pot test is normally not made for AC electrical
switchgear and therefore may be considered only when AC hi-
pot cannot be performed.
b. The hi-pot testing of switchgear involves testing of the circuit
breakers and switchgear buses separately. This is a major test
and determines the condition of the insulation of the
switchgear assembly.
c. The DC hi-pot test is not preferred for testing AC
switchgear because the application of DC voltage does not
produce similar stress in the insulation system as is produced
under operating conditions. Moreover, the DC hi-pot test
produces corona and tracking owing to concentration of stress
at sharp edges or end points of buses.
d. If DC hi-pot testing is to be performed, the DC voltage test
values shown in Table are recommended for various voltage-
class equipment.
e. DC Hi-Pot Maintenance Test Values
Rated operating voltage 1 min. DC test voltage
240 1,600
480 2,100
600 2,300
2,400 15,900
4,160 20,100
7,200 27,600
13,800 38,200
23,000 63,600
34,500 84,800
f. The hi-pot test should be conducted under conditions similar

to those of commercial testing.
g. The switchgear should be wiped, cleaned, and restored to good
condition before the hi-pot test is conducted. Temperature
and humidity readings should be recorded, and the test reading
corrected when conducting DC tests.
B. AC Hi-Pot Test
a. This test should be conducted separately for circuit breakers
and switchgear buses (stationary gear). It should be made only

after the DC insulation resistance measurement test has been
passed satisfactorily and all cleanup has been finished.
b. The AC test will stress the switchgear insulation similarly to
the stresses found during operating conditions. The
maintenance test voltages should be 75% of final factory test
voltage.
c. Hi-Pot Test Values
Rated Operating AC Factory Proof Test (V) AC Test Maintenance
Voltage Values (V)
240 1,500 1,130
480 2,000 1,500
600 2,200 1,650
2,400 15,000 11,300
4,160 19,000 14,250
7,200 26,000 19,500
13,800 36,000 27,000
14,400 50,000 37,500
23,000 60,000 45,000
34,500 80,000 60,000
d. Hi-pot tests are made with the circuit breaker in both open and
closed positions. The hi-pot test should be the last test
conducted after all repairs have been made, cleanup is
finished, and the insulation resistance test has been
successfully passed.

e. Procedures for the hi-pot test of the circuit breaker are as
follows:
(1) The test connection for the hi-pot test is as shown in the
Figure.
(2) Circuit breaker in open position:
 Connect HV lead to pole 6. Ground all other poles. Repeat
for poles 1 through 5, in turn, with all other poles
grounded.
 Apply the desired high voltage in each case in
accordance with above Table.

(3) Circuit breaker in closed position: Connect HV lead to pole
1 or 2 or phase 1 as convenient with either pole of phases 2
and 3 grounded. Repeat for test for phases 2 and 3 with
other phases grounded.
(4) Stationary gear (buses): Connect HV lead to phase 1 as
convenient with phases 2 and 3 grounded. Apply the
recommended voltage. Repeat the test for phases 2 and 3
with other phases grounded.
3.2.3 Power factor or dielectric loss test
A. The power factor testing of an insulation system is useful
in finding signs of insulation deterioration. The absolute values
of power factor measured have little significance.
B. However, comparative analysis of values from year to year may
very well show insulation deterioration. Therefore, when a power
factor test is made, it should be made under the same conditions
of temperature and humidity. If differences exist in the
temperature and humidity from year to year, this should be taken
into consideration when evaluating the test data.
C. Generally, higher temperature and humidity result in higher
power factor values. As a general rule, only the air circuit breaker
bushing should be power factored, and the arc chutes, operating
rods, and so on, should be disconnected when conducting this
test.
D. A significant change, especially an increase in watts loss or
percent of power factor indicates deterioration, which should be
monitored.
3.2.4 Circuit Breaker Contact Resistance Measurement Test
A. Stationary and moving contacts are built from alloys that are
formulated to endure the stresses of electrical arcing.
B. However, if contacts are not maintained on a regular basis, their
electrical resistance due to repeated arcing builds up, resulting in
a significant decrease in the contact’s ability to carry current.
Excessive corrosion of contacts is detrimental to the breaker
performance.
C. One way to check contacts is to apply DC and measure the
contact resistance or voltage drop across the closed contacts.
D. The breaker contact resistance should be measured from bushing
terminal to bushing terminal with the breaker in closed
position. It is recommended that for MV and HV the resistance

test be made with 100 A or higher DC. The use of a higher current
value gives more reliable results than using lower current values.
E. The resistance value is usually measured in microohms (µΩ).
The average resistance value for 15 kV class circuit breakers is
approximately between 200 and 250µΩ. Several companies
make good, reliable micro-ohmmeters to perform this testing.
3.2.5 Circuit Breaker Time-Travel Analysis
A. This test is usually performed on MV and HV circuit breakers,
usually 34 kV and above, to detect problems in the breaker
operating mechanism.
B. This test can be conducted with a mechanical or electronic time–
travel analyzer.
C. Today, the electronic time-travel analyzers are replacing the old
mechanical time–travel analyzers. With either analyzer
information on the breaker operating mechanism is provided in
form of charts or graphs which can be used to assess the
mechanical and electrical condition of the breaker.
D. There are eight tests that are usually conducted on the breaker
with the circuit breaker analyzer. These tests are:
a. Closing and opening time:
In the example below, the closing time of the contacts is shown
to be 31.4 ms (phase A), 30.2 ms (phase B), and 31.8
ms (phase C).
Parameters Value Unit

001 Close time A 31.4 ms
060 Bounce time A 0.0 ms
001 Close time B 30.2 ms
060 Bounce time B 1.1 ms
001 Close time C 31.8 ms
060 Bounce time C 0.8 ms
010 Diff time A – B – C 1.6 ms
016 Cls speed 8.40 m/s

b. Contact bounce
 If we expand the x-axis , we can actually view the contact
bounce associated with the above breaker operation as
shown.
 It is clear to see that there is 0.8 ms bounce associated with
the contact movement in phase C. These series of contact
bounces can be compared with future tests to see if there is
any degradation to the actual mechanism associated with
breaker contacts.
c. Opening and closing synchronization
 The breaker opening and synchronization can be viewed as a
group, i.e., the operation of all three phases together for
breaker open and close cycle.
 This information will indicate whether the breaker contacts
open and close together or how far apart the three-
phase contacts are relative to each other during the close and
open cycle as shown in the example below.
 The normal maximum time difference between all three
phases should not be more than 2 ms for most breakers.
Parameters Value Unit
010 Diff time A – B – C 1.6 ms
 The synchronization of a breaker is defined as the time

difference between the fastest and slowest phase (contact
make and break) during the breaker open and close
operation.

Graph showing contact bounce of a breaker
d. Total opening and closing speed
 All breakers have specific speed, opening and closing times.
Therefore, it is important that breakers operate within their
opening and closing time.
 For example, if a breaker is slow to open due to ageing or
degradation, it may compromise the protection and
coordination scheme of the protective relays, and thereby
cause unwanted power interruption and equipment damage.
e. Trip operation
 The trip operation of a breaker is another name for an
open operation. Most utility companies and plant owners
want to perform a trip (or open) operation to monitor the
speed of the opening mechanism and contacts to make sure
there is enough energy in the spring mechanism to open
under a fault condition.
 The graph for a trip is similar to the one for a close operation,
except the motion of the mechanism is going in the opposite
direction, i.e., from closed contacts to fully open position as
seen in Figure.
Graph showing speed of the contacts opening for trip (or open) operation of a breaker

f. Trip-free operation
 This operation simulates the condition when an open breaker
is closed into a fault and then it is tripped free by a protective
relay.
 Trip-free is an operation where the breaker contacts are in the
open position and the breaker is operated to perform a close–
open sequence. In this operation, the breaker is closed and
then immediately sent a control command to open.
 This operation confirms whether a breaker, if closed into a
fault, can clear it.
 The graph for a trip-free operation is shown in Figure below.
Graph showing trip-free operation of a breaker
g. Close operation
 This test is performed to verify a breaker’s closing
mechanism.
Graph showing close operation of a breaker

h. Trip-reclose operation

 In this test, the reclose operation of the breaker is checked to
assure that the breaker closing time is within specified
limits after a trip operation. The reclose time is measured
either in milliseconds or cycles.
 The trip-reclose operation of the breaker is shown in Figure.
– Graph showing trip-reclose operation of a breaker
 The problems usually detected with this test are faulty

dashpots, faulty adjustments, weak accelerating springs,
defective shock absorbers, buffers and closing mechanisms,
or broken parts.
 This test should be performed during acceptance tests and
then during maintenance tests about every 3 years.
3.2.6 WIRING CHECK
A. Completeness of control connection (wiring)
B. Cable cross section according to control diagram suitability
C. Insulated wires are not laying at sharp edges or live parts
D. Apparent quality of cables and wires' insulation
E. Cables and wires are neat
F. Flexibility of wires
G. Numbering of wires and terminal blocks
H. Unity of cable terminals
I. Verification of the strong connection of wires on terminal blocks
J. Color code of wires according to drawings
K. The conformity of auxiliary and control circuits to the circuits
diagrams and wiring diagrams shall be checked
3.2.7 MECHANICAL TESTS
A. Mechanical operation of C.B in ON/OFF positions.
B. Mechanical movement of CB in Test / Service positions.
C. Easiness of the mechanical movement of the earthing switch.
D. Mechanical operation of earthing switches in ON/OFF positions.
E. Mechanical interlock between C.B and door.
F. Mechanical interlock between C.B and earthing switch.
G. All mechanical parts work properly.
H. Fixing of devices, C.B., contactors …etc. in the low voltage
compartments.
I. Doors function (hinges and locks….).
3.2.8 ELECTRICAL TESTS
A. Electrical operation of C.B in ON/OFF positions.
B. Electrical operation of C.B in Test/Service positions.
C. Testing of control circuit devices according to the control
diagram.
D. opportunity of devices with required control circuit
(voltage/ampere/burden).
E. availability of devices protection with fuses/MCBs with suitable
ratio.
F. 8.6 availability of control circuits protection with fuses/MCBs
with suitable ratio.
G. proper function of control circuit according to the circuit
diagrams.
H. Protection relays and devices are parameterized/programmed.
I. Verification of the protection relays functions.
J. Check the signal list availability on the binary input of the
protection relay.
K. Testing of circuit breaker timing (close/open).
L. Measure and control all signals from the protection relays by
mean of RTU.
M. Measuring the contact resistance of the circuit breakers.
N. primary injection test for Current and voltage transformers (C.
T’s and V.T).
O. Secondary injection test for protection relays and metering
device.
P. Testing of heaters.
Q. Partial Discharge measurement (IEC61869-2/3)
R. Thickness of silver plate for connection point
S. Measurement of conductivity resistance of the panel.
3.2.9 FAT tests
Refer to previous routine tests.

3.2.10 SAT tests
These tests are listed as follows:
A. Visual inspection
B. Installation check
C. Torque wrench
D. Mechanical interlock
E. Electrical interlock (operation and function)
F. Contact resistance
G. Heaters test
H. Primary injection for VT
I. Secondary injection for VT
J. Primary injection for CT
K. Secondary injection for CT
L. Setting relay for protection devices (Test protection relays)
M. Megger
N. Di-Electric
O. Megger.

B. Inspection procedures
1. Transformer’s checklist
A. The following table shall indicate the points to be checked in the
transformer room after supplying and installing of transformers and its
related devices. All indicated items shall be checked to assure all that all
quality procedures are met, and the installed equipment are ready for
energization after executing required site acceptance test (SAT). The room
dimensions with allocated equipment and trenches sizes shall be checked
to verify its conformity with the approved drawings.
1 Collect all drawing (Approved SLD, as built, Approved Shop drawing, catalogs)
2 FAT for the transformer
3 Check the transformer enclosure, cores and ensure that, there is no damage
4 Check the transformer IP not less than 21
5 Check availability of overloading transformer to 140 % with forced ventilation
Check the transformer room dimensions, clearances and its door (ease of transformer
6
entry and exit with enclosure).
7 Check the transformer room and trench firefighting system
8 Check the transformer room and trench fire alarm system
9 Check the transformer wheels and its slots.
check the medium voltage termination

10
(Torque wrench, suitable glands)
Check all the L.V connections (cables or busways)
11
(Torque wrench, suitable cables glands)
12 check installation of surge arrester at medium voltage side.
13 Check the room ventilation and exhaust fans.
14 Check the room lighting, and the emergency light.
15 Ensure that all doors and the transformer body are connected to the earth

Inspection procedures
16 Check that the neutral at LV side is earthed
17 Check the transformer cooling fans
18 Check the transformer control panel (its supply and connection to RTU)
19 Check the temperature sensors installation.
check the earthing system inside and outside the room (test links, earth cables and earth
20
pits)
21 The earth resistance is not more than 2 Ohm.
22 Check Access Control system for the door
23 Check the transformer room door earthing
2. Cables inspections
2.1 Cables, Low-Voltage, 600 Volt Maximum
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
a. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and
evidence of overheating.
b. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one
of the following methods:
(1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
(2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method.
(3) Perform thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match
and indentation.
2.2 Cables medium-voltage
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
a. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and
evidence of overheating and corona.
b. Inspect terminations and splices for evidence of overheating and
corona.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one
of the following methods:

(1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
(2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method.
(3) Perform thermographic survey
d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match
and indentation.
e. Inspect shield grounding, cable support, and termination.
f. Verify that visible cable bends meet or exceed ICEA and/or
manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius.
g. Inspect fireproofing in common cable areas.
h. If cables are terminated through window-type current transformers,
inspect to verify that neutral and ground conductors are correctly
placed and that shields are correctly terminated for operation of
protective devices.
3. Primary Medium voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units

checklist
A. The following tables shall indicate the points to be checked in the
switchgear room after supplying and installing of switchgear, ring main
units and its related devices. All indicated items shall be checked to assure
all that all quality procedures are met, and the installed equipment are ready
for energization after executing required site acceptance test (SAT). The
room dimensions with allocated equipment and trenches sizes shall be
checked to verify its conformity with the approved drawings.
S.N Primary Medium voltage Switchgear
2 FAT for all equipment
3 Check the civil works of the distributer (cracks, painting, isolating, water, sewage)
4 Check the floor painting by epoxy
5 Check the eye wash / bathroom and its connections
6 Check the clearances between the distributor and walls
7 Check the windows and its boundary
8 Check the trenches, all sleeves and cover plate of trench.
9 check the execution of manholes at the entrance of cables (if applicable)
10 Check ventilation and exhaust fans inside the rooms (SWGR - battery -Trans)
11 Check the distributor room doors and its earthing
12 Check the distributer body and ensure that, there is not any damage
13 check the fire barriers between cells at main busbar crossing
Check the door rubber, Lock and all doors of the cells is closing correctly and
14
earthed
15 Check all cells numbering front and back of cells
16 Check the installation of energy meters in cells
17 Check the installation and testing of remote terminal unit (RTU)
18 Check the fire Fighting system inside the rooms (swgr - trans)
19 check the fire search of the switchgear
20 Check the fire alarm system inside the rooms (swgr - trans - battery)
21 Check the fire Fighting system and fire alarm inside the trench
Check earthing system and all connections inside the room
22
(two separate test links one for each section)
23 check earthing system and all connections outside building
Check the incoming and outgoing cables terminations for distributor and internal
24
support
25 Check all cable holes, cable glands and cable support inside trench
26 Check Access Control system for all doors that have access to streets
27 Check all L.V accessories (sockets, lighting, emergency light)
28 Check the installation and labels of Ring Main Unit (RMU)
check the MV cable terminations of RMU (internal support, cables holes, glands,
29
bottom plate, support inside the trench)
30 Check the installation and testing of remote terminal unit (RMU - RTU)
Check the auxiliary transformer (MV and LV cables connection, earthing, surge
31
arrestor, control panel)
32 check the earth system inside Aux trans room
33 Check the main Low voltage Panel of the Aux. transformer
34 Check battery room space, ventilation, and exhaust fans
35 Check all battery connections
36 Check the battery charger and its connection, earthing
37 Check the DC panel Board
39 Check the interlock between the circuit breakers and the earth switch
40 Check the operation of the cells (mechanical and electrical)
41 Check the heater in each cell and its connection and the hygrostat.
42 Check shutter between the circuit breakers and busbars
43 Check the V. Ts and C. Ts
44 Check all control wires and ensure that there is not any loose
45 Check all the measuring devices and protection devices
46 Check all control devices on cells
47 Check the breakers trolley
48 Check the spare parts
SN Ring Main Units

2 FAT for all equipment
3 Check the RMU body and ensure that, there is not any damage
4 Check the installed RMU as per the approved shop drawing
5 Check medium voltage terminations
6 check cable holes, glands, internal support, bottom plate, and support inside trench
7 check fire alarm system inside the room and trench
8 Check firefighting system inside the room and trench
9 Check the fault passage indicator
10 check voltage presence indicator
11 Check the sf6 gas level

12 Check the protection relay for Transformer CB and its setting
13 Check the transformer fuse rating for LBS
14 Check the measuring cell and space for KWH meter
15 check fuses for VT
16 check 220 VAC source for feeding power supply (if applicable)
17 check installation of energy meter
18 check RTU installation and testing
19 Check the operation for all L.B.S and the mechanical interlock
20 Check the light in the medium voltage Room and the emergency light
21 check room ventilation
22 Check the accessibility for the RMU and you can work without any constrains
check the earthing system inside and outside the room (test links, earth cables and
23
earth pits)
25 Check the room door earthing
26 Check Access Control system for the door
27 Check the spare parts

C. Energization process and Quality procedures after energizing
1. Energization Process:
A. After finishing of installation of all electrical equipment and cables. All
installations are inspected for quality assurance. All equipment shall be
tested on site with the presence of project owner, consultant, contractor,
and supplier. All contracts for the project should be finished and energy
meters to be installed. All equipment warranty certificates to be submitted.
All project documents, SLD and approved drawings should be submitted.
Cables shall be tested within 24 hours from energization. Dielectric tests
(High pot test) shall be performed on primary medium voltage switchgear
and RMU within 24 hours from energization. After finishing all these
procedures, the equipment shall be ready for energization.
B. Contractor of the project is responsible for the process of operation and
maintenance of medium voltage equipment with supervision of ACUD
quality engineers till the final delivery of the project to the electrical
distribution company.
1.1 Transformers
C. Supplier shall perform the required periodic maintenance based on the
warranty and contract between the owner and supplier.
1.2 cables
A. In case of fault occurring due to cable damage, the electrical service
shall be interrupted due to this fault. Insulation resistance test (Megger)
shall be executed on the three phases of the required cable to detect if
there’s a problem in this cable. the testing car (Van) shall test the cable
to detect the location of fault. With checking the route of cables and
the required location which the car provides, the fault location can be
detected exactly. Then the required joints can be executed to re-
energize the cables. After finishing the required joints, the cables shall
be tested again to confirm its capability. the cables shall be energized,
and the phase rotation shall be tested before loading of cables.
1.3 Primary Medium voltage Switchgear and Ring Main Units
A. Preventive periodic maintenance and periodic visits for observing any
abnormal conditions shall be done. Operation and maintenance team
shall be available on site.

Energization process
IV.Electrical safety guideline

Electrical safety procedures
1. Introduction:
A. Work shall be executed and at the Site in compliance with the latest edition,
revision or supplement of the OSHA occupational safety and health standard
which are in effect on the date as this agreement, and the Safety Program
submitted by developer and approved by ACUD.
B. All local applicable laws, regulations, standards, and codes governing
Environmental safety and health in the workplace “Egyptian Environmental
Health & Safety regulations”.
C. Any dispute regarding the implementation of the site safety program, all
applicable OSHA code and standard requirements will prevail.
2. MEDICAL SERVICES, TREATMENT, & REPORTING

A. Clean first aid treatment facilities shall be maintained, and all emergency
equipment shall be inspected daily to ensure effective operation.
B. Proper sterilization methods and materials shall be used, and provision made
for proper disposal of hazardous medical wastes, including a "sharps"
container for the secure disposal of used needles and similar medical items.
C. Authorized site personnel who provide medical treatment shall be properly
trained and qualified and have construction sites experience with a copy of
their current certifications, past experience maintained on site.
D. Supervisor shall ensure injured employees are referred to qualified
industrial/occupational medical providers if offsite treatment is needed and
provide or obtain transportation for such offsite medical treatment.
E. The status of employees injured on the Project and returned for modified duty
shall be documented by the treating medical practitioner and reported to the
ACUD safety and health Supervisor.
F. Workers’ compensation and insurance claims forms shall be filed as
applicable, and all medical records and reports shall be kept confidential.
G. Hospitals and physicians shall be identified for rendering treatment for work
related injuries and illnesses and a certified physician shall be assigned to
Medical Director.
H. The Medical Director shall provide written medical directives/protocols that
will be followed by medical personnel.
I. Safety and Health Representative shall review all return-to-work work related
injured employees and ensure that they are completed their treatment and the
certified physician report indicate that they are fit to perform their normal
tasks or restricted work.

3. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Tools shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations,
have required guards in place, and are maintained in good working order. Job-
made or modified tools of any kind shall not be used, without ACUD written
approval.
B. Job-made tools will not be used at the Project (e.g. tools made of rebar,
rigging equipment, etc.).
C. All tools and equipment shall be used and maintained in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations. If exceptions to this rule are needed (i.e.
spreader beams), they must be brought to ACUD attention for review and
acceptance prior to use.
D. Developer shall only permit properly trained and certified employees to use
powder-actuated tools. Control shall be kept of the powder-actuated charges.
Each cartridge shall be accounted for and properly stored. No live or spent
cartridges shall be left on the ground or disposed of in Project trashcans or
other unauthorized on or off-site container.
E. Hand power tools shall be inspected by a competent electrician and use color
coding to identify inspected equipment.
F. Pressure relief valves shall be installed on air manifolds and compressors
supplying air to hoses which has inner diameter greater than 0.5 inch.
G. Work shall be performed only in areas and at times where adequate
illumination exists. Proper lighting is required to safely perform work.
Artificial lighting equipment shall be manufactured to a recognized
international standard acceptable to ACUD.
4. Emergency response plan

A. All employees must be aware that a clear evacuation plan exists in case of an
emergency. A risk management plan is required by the EPA if your
workplace stores, uses, or will be working around highly hazardous
chemicals and materials.
B. Emergency preparedness goal is to reduce employee injury and property
damage in case of an emergency. A written emergency plan should contain
the following minimum elements.
a. Emergency escape route assignments.
b. Procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacuation.
c. Rescue and medical duties.
d. The preferred means for reporting fires and other emergencies.

C. To make the program effective, the emergency action plan should address all
potential emergencies that can be expected in the workplace. It is important
to consider what emergencies may arise so you can prepare for them before
they occur.
The emergency action and first aid procedures training for all employees
for the following:
a. Evacuation plan.
b. Alarm systems and warning horns.
c. Reporting procedures for personnel.
d. Shutdown procedures for equipment and other processes.
5. Working on Energized Parts and Equipment:

A. Qualified electrician can be complete certain electrical tasks. This means that
the fundamental factor that determines your status as a qualified electrician
depends on the work to be performed. The determining factors are technical
expertise and knowledge of the electrical safe work practices necessary for
the task at hand.
Expertise is a quality that must be demonstrated or documented. One method
of proving expertise is through specific training or certifications
B. Safe distance
a. Electricians often complete regular safety programs, manufacturer
specific training, and management training courses that provide the
tradesman with certification.
Dimensions listed are the distance from energized electrical conductors or circuit part
Nominal System Exposed Exposed Restricted Prohibited

Voltage Range Movable Fixed circuit Approach Approach
phase to phase conductor part Boundary Boundary
Less than 50 V Not specified Not Not specified Not specified
50 to 300 V 3m specified
1 m in. Avoid contact Avoid contact
301 to 750 V 3m 1 m in. 0.3 m 25 mm
751 to 15 KV 3m 1.5 m in. 0.7 m. 0.2m
15.1 kV to 36 KV 3m 1.8 m in. 0.8m. 0.3m.

5.1 Energized work permits
A. Energized work permits are used to document your intention to perform
hot work and your client’s understanding of the scope of work that will
be done.
B. “If live parts are not placed into an electrically safe work condition” An
exception provides for work performed on or near live parts by a qualified
person.
C. what must be included in an energized work permit. It should include, but
is not limited to, the following items:
a. A description of the circuit and equipment to be worked on and the
location
b. The name and qualifications of the person or people who will be
performing the work
c. The start date and time and the estimated finish date and time for the
job
d. Justification/rationale for why the work must be performed in an
energized condition
e. A description of the safe work practices that will be used
f. Results of the shock hazard analysis
g. Determination of the shock protection boundaries
h. Results of the flash hazard analysis
i. The flash protection boundary
j. The necessary PPE to safely perform the assigned task
k. Methods that will be used to restrict the access of unqualified persons
from the work area.

D. Working space constraints that make access to the equipment limited or
difficult, including energized circuits or parts that will be present behind
the qualified work, or irregular or uneven working surfaces. Include an
assessment of obstructions that could make emergency escape difficult.
5.2 LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
A. The term “lockout/tagout” describes procedures used to safeguard
employees from the unexpected energization or startup of machinery and
equipment, or the release of hazardous energy during service,
maintenance, or installation of additional equipment.
B. Lockout/tagout, or lock and tag, is a recognized safety practice that is
used to ensure that dangerous machines are properly shut off and cannot
be started up again prior to the completion of maintenance or servicing
work.
C. Furthermore, a person’s lock and tag must not be removed by anyone

other than the individual who installed the lock and tag.
D. The National Electrical Code has general requirements that require that a
safety service disconnect must be installed within sight of the service-
able equipment.

5.3 Stored energy:
A. stored energy is the residual or built-up energy held within a component.
B. Stored energy can occur in capacitors or batteries, or in spring-loaded
devices, suspended weights, or compressed gases. Stored electrical
energy must be dissipated by discharging or grounding after the main
energy source has been isolated. Carefully release all stored energy as
part of the de-energizing process and be mindful that many types of
machinery contain more than one energy source.
C. Test to make sure that all stored energy has been released. Push the start
button on equipment to verify that all electrical energy is eliminated and
has been properly deactivated or isolated.
D. Stored energy hazards occur when energy that is confined is released
unexpectedly. Before you lockout electrical systems, you must make sure
that all equipment is completely free of electricity.
5.4 Re-energizing protocols:
A. After the work or maintenance is complete and equipment is ready for
normal operations, the authorized employee needs to first clear the area
around the machines or equipment of all personnel to ensure that no one
is exposed and any tools during re-energizing. After all of these steps
have been taken, the authorized employee can operate the energy-
isolating devices to restore energy to the machine or equipment.
B. One of your best safety practices is to be proactive against existing and
potential electrical hazards. This happens through knowledge, aware-
ness, experience, and practicing safety protocols.
6. Electrical System Grounding and Bonding

A. Grounding protects against shock hazards posed by fault currents. An
electrical fault occurs when current flows through an abnormal or unintended
path. A fault current is several times greater than the current that normally
flows through a circuit
B. All circuits need to have a system of grounding. Grounding assures that all
metal parts of a circuit that you might come in contact with are connected
directly to the earth, maintaining them at zero voltage.

7. Personal Protective Equipment
7.1 Eye protection
A. All contractors and subcontractors must ensure that workers use proper
eye protection.
B. . Eye protection should be selected based on potential hazards based on
the workplace environment and tasks at hand.
7.2 Head protection

A. Hardhats have a hard outer shell and a shock-absorbing lining with a
headband and straps that suspend the shell. The basic design provides
shock absorption in the event of an impact

7.3 Footwear
A. make sure that all workers wear protective footwear.
7.4 Electrical protective gloves

A. High voltage gloves are a form of PPE that is required for employees who
work near live electrical current.
B. Electrical protective gloves are categorized by the level of voltage
protection they provide.

C. medium voltage gloves must be inspected for any damage before each
day’s use.
8. First aid
A. Simple first aid can reduce the physical damage caused by an accident or even
save a life.
First aid is a safety necessity. When someone gets hurt you need to quickly
assess the situation, call for help, and then render any assistance that you
can without putting yourself in harm’s way.


اشتراطات العاصمة

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

اشتراطات العاصمة

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫شركة العاصمة اﻹدارية للتنمية العمراﻧية‬

‫‪ACUD electric red book‬‬ ‫‪1 of 221‬‬ ‫‪Rev.0, Jan 2023‬‬

ACUD electric red book 2 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 3 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 4 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 5 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 6 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 7 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 8 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 9 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 10 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

Developer Asks for electrical approval

Project design drawings submittal

Approved No Developer receives

Approved No Developer receives

Start the project the site

Start the energization

Quality team attends SAT Project Energization

ACUD electric red book 11 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 12 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

2. Power Supply Methodology

ACUD electric red book 13 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 14 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 15 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 16 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 17 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 18 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 19 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

D. MV cable armoring shall be either steel wire armored (SWA) type

ACUD electric red book 20 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 21 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 22 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 23 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 24 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 25 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 26 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 27 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 28 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 31 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 32 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 38 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 39 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 40 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 41 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 42 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 43 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 45 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 49 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 50 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 52 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

3. MV DISTRIBUTOR ROOM GROUNDING

4. RING MAIN UNIT (RMU) ROOM GROUNDING

5. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS AND KIOSKS

ACUD electric red book 53 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 54 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 55 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 56 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 57 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 59 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 60 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

ACUD electric red book 63 of 221 Rev.0, Jan 2023

3. SECONDRY MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

4. SMART GRID SWITCHGEAR REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT